JP7389553B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that, when a lottery opportunity occurs during a game, displays symbols in a variable manner and then stops and displays the symbols in a manner according to the lottery result.

Conventionally, various efforts have been made to suppress a decline in players' expectations for games. For example, when the time shortening state is entered after the end of a special game, for the first change after the end of the special game, a gaming machine that sets a longer time than usual as the stop display time of the special symbol known (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-100973

According to the above-mentioned prior art, by extending the stop display time more than usual, it is thought that the player can accumulate more reservations (memories) during that time.
However, if the stop display time is simply extended, no change in performance will be seen, and there is a risk that the player will get bored with the performance.

Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a technique for preventing players from getting bored.

The present invention employs the following solving means to solve the above-mentioned problems. Note that the following words in parentheses are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited thereto. Moreover, the present invention can be an invention that includes at least one of each invention specific matter shown in the following solution means. Furthermore, each invention specifying matter shown in the solution below can be made into a lower concept by adding elements that limit the invention specifying matter, or it can be made into a higher concept by deleting the elements that limit the invention specifying matter. .

Solution 1: The gaming machine of the present invention includes a lottery element acquisition means for acquiring lottery elements necessary for executing a predetermined lottery when a lottery opportunity occurs, a lottery element storage means for storing the lottery elements, and a predetermined lottery element. a lottery execution means for executing the predetermined lottery using the lottery element when the lottery element is stored in a state where the starting condition is satisfied; a symbol display means for displaying a symbol in a variable manner over a variable time and then stopping display; a variable effect execution means for executing a variable effect in conjunction with the variable display of the symbol within the variable time; and a variable performance determining means that determines the content of the specific performance forming a part of the symbol, and enables the content of the specific performance to be determined anew based on an event that occurs after the start of symbol variation.

In the game machine of the present solution, the game progresses in the following flow, for example.
(1) When a game ball is launched, it flows down the game area while being guided by obstacle nails, windmills, structures, etc. In the process, it may pass through some area or enter various ball entrances. do. When the game ball passes/enters the starting area (starting gate, starting winning hole), a lottery opportunity occurs.

(2) When a lottery opportunity occurs during the game (when a game ball enters the starting prize hole), the lottery elements (special symbol jackpot random numbers) necessary for executing the prescribed lottery (special symbol lottery) are acquired. .

(3) The lottery elements obtained in (2) above are stored. The lottery elements can be stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, up to 4 for the first special symbol and up to 3 for the second special symbol).

(4) If the lottery element described in (3) above is stored in a state where a predetermined starting condition (for example, the condition that the jackpot game is not in progress and the symbols are not fluctuating or stopped displaying) is met, the lottery element is used. Then, the predetermined lottery described in (2) above is executed.

(5) When the predetermined lottery described in (2) above is executed, the symbols (special symbols) are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined variable time, and then are stopped and displayed. The manner in which the symbols are stopped and displayed represents the result of a predetermined lottery.

(6) During the variation time mentioned in (5) above, a variation effect is executed in conjunction with the variation display of the symbols (special symbols).

(7) The content of the variable performance described in (6) above is determined twice by the variable performance determining means. The first time is the timing before the start of symbol variation, and here the contents of the first performance and second performance (specific performance) that constitute the fluctuation performance are determined. Moreover, the second time is any timing after the start of symbol variation, and here the content of the specific performance can be determined anew based on the event that occurred after the symbol variation started.

Generally, the contents of the fluctuating effect executed in conjunction with the fluctuating display of the symbols are determined all at once before the fluctuating starts, based on the results of the lottery. When the content of the variable performance is determined in this way, even if a plurality of types of performance patterns are prepared, the player becomes accustomed to the performance pattern as the player plays the game a number of times. As a result, the player may become bored with the contents of the fluctuating performance, and while the fluctuating performance is being executed, the player may wait for the fluctuation to stop, without paying particular attention to the content.

On the other hand, in this solution, the content of the specific effect that forms part of the variable effect is determined before the start of the symbol variation, and the content of the specific effect is further determined based on an event that occurs after the start of the symbol variation. Therefore, the content of the specific performance is difficult to predict even if the player plays the game many times. Therefore, according to the present solving means, it is possible to execute a fresh variable performance whose contents are less predictable compared to general variable performances, and it is possible to prevent players from getting bored.

Solution 2: In the gaming machine of the present solution, in the solution means 1, the variable production determining means determines the content of the specific production if a predetermined condition is satisfied after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of symbol variation. The content is determined before the start of symbol variation without being determined based on an event that occurs after the start of symbol variation.

In this solution, the following features are added.
(8) The second determination by the fluctuation performance determining means in (7) above will be made when a predetermined condition is met after a predetermined period of time has passed from the start of symbol variation (if a situation that is considered abnormal occurs). Not done. In this case, the content of the specific performance is determined by the first determination (before the start of symbol variation). Therefore, the specific performance will be executed with the content determined before the start of symbol variation.

The situation that is considered abnormal is a situation where it is considered that some kind of problem has occurred (not normal), such as not being able to receive a notification that is scheduled to be received. If normal processing continues despite this situation, there is a risk that problems may occur, such as execution of the effect suddenly stopping, or effects that do not match the game situation being executed. be.

In contrast, in this solution, if a situation that is considered abnormal occurs, the content of the specific performance is not redetermined based on the event that occurred after the start of the symbol change, but is determined before the start of the change in the symbol. A specific performance is executed with the specified content. Therefore, according to the present solution, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned problems from occurring in situations that are considered abnormal, and even in such situations, it is possible to prevent players from feeling distrustful or uncomfortable about the game. The performance can be executed appropriately without any trouble.

Solution 3: The gaming machine of the present solution, in solution 1 or 2, further comprises destination determining means for making a preliminary determination on the acquired lottery element when the lottery element is newly acquired, and The variable performance determining means is capable of determining the content of the specific performance based on the result of the predetermined lottery and the preliminary determination result made for each of the lottery elements acquired after the start of variation of symbols.

In this solution, the following features are added.
(9) When the lottery element in (2) above is newly acquired, a preliminary determination (earlier determination process) is performed for the lottery element. In the preliminary determination, it is determined whether or not the predetermined lottery described in (2) above corresponds to anything other than non-winning (big hit, small win) based on the lottery element.

(10) The fluctuation performance determining means in (7) above obtains the result of the predetermined lottery executed in (4) above (whether the fluctuation corresponds to anything other than non-winning) and the result obtained after the symbol fluctuation starts. Based on the results of the preliminary judgment in (6) above (whether or not each lottery element obtained after the start of variation corresponds to anything other than non-winning), the content of the specific performance is determined for each lottery element. can be determined.

According to the present solution, the content of the specific performance is determined based on the lottery results for the fluctuation and the results of preliminary determination for each lottery element obtained from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time has elapsed. Therefore, the content of the specific performance will reflect in some way the results of subsequent changes in addition to the results of the change in question. Therefore, the player can be further attracted to the game by the development of the specific performance, and the player can be further prevented from getting bored.

Solution 4: In the gaming machine of the present solution, in any one of solutions 1 to 3, the fluctuation performance determining means determines the performance executed in the first section from the start of symbol fluctuation until the predetermined time elapses. is the first performance, and a performance performed in a second section after the first section is the second performance.

In this solution, the following features are added.
(11) The first performance in (7) above requires a predetermined period of time from the start of symbol fluctuation (a certain amount of time that allows you to memorize up to the upper limit of lottery elements if you hit the game ball in a general manner) , for example, 20 seconds), which is performed in the first section. Further, the second performance corresponds to a performance performed in a second section after the first section, that is, a section after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation.

In this solution, the first performance is a performance that is executed during a period of a certain length in which the working memory can be charged (or increased, accumulated, stored, added, etc.; the same applies hereinafter) to the maximum number. For example, it consists of content that encourages the charging of working memory. Furthermore, the content of the second effect to be performed in the subsequent second section is determined based on the event that occurs within the first section (so to speak, the working memory charge section).

Therefore, according to the present solution, by executing the first performance, the player is made to recognize that the first period is an effective time to charge the working memory, and a certain number of pieces are set within the first period. This allows the player's working memory to be charged, thereby sustaining the player's desire to play. In addition, in the subsequent second section, a second performance with fresh content that is difficult to predict can be performed based on the events that occurred during the first section, so it is possible to prevent players from getting bored. .

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to prevent players from getting bored.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view showing the game board unit alone. It is a diagram showing details of the second variable prize winning device 31. It is a diagram showing details of the second variable prize winning device 31. It is a front view showing a part of the game board unit in an enlarged manner. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices installed in a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram showing the functional configuration within the production control device. It is a diagram showing the relationship between settings and winning probability of special symbol lottery. 12 is a flowchart (1/2) showing an example of a procedure of reset start processing. 12 is a flowchart (2/2) illustrating a procedure example of reset start processing. 3 is a flowchart specifically illustrating an example of a procedure for checking the occurrence of a power outage. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for interrupt management processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for processing a switch input event. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the 1st special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the 2nd special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a performance determination process at the time of acquisition. It is a flowchart showing a configuration example of special symbol game processing. It is a flowchart showing a procedure example of special symbol variation pre-processing. It is a flowchart showing a procedure example of special symbol storage area shift processing. It is a diagram showing a configuration example of a stop symbol selection table at the time of a first special symbol jackpot. It is a diagram showing a configuration example of a stop symbol selection table at the time of a second special symbol jackpot. It is a diagram showing an example of a symbol selection table that stops at the time of a first special symbol small hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol selection table which stops at the time of the 2nd special symbol small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of special symbol stop display processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a configuration example of display output management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a structure of variable prize winning device management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big prize opening pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing a procedure example of a big winning opening pattern setting process at the time of a jackpot. It is a figure which shows an example of the release pattern setting table by symbol at the time of a jackpot. It is a flowchart showing a procedure example of a big winning opening pattern setting process when a small hit occurs. It is a figure which shows an example of the release pattern setting table at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big prize opening opening/closing operation process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the 2nd big prize opening opening/closing operation process. 12 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of a specific area opening/closing operation process. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for processing when passing through a specific area. It is a diagram showing an example of an opening pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the 1st big prize opening opening/closing operation process. It is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the big prize opening closing process. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for termination processing. It is a flowchart showing a configuration example of normal symbol game processing. It is a diagram showing an example of a variation time of a normal symbol and an opening pattern of a variable start winning device. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the first special symbol changes in the normal mode. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the second special symbol changes in the normal mode. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 1st special symbol fluctuates in stadium mode. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the second special symbol changes in the stadium mode. It is a continuous diagram showing an example of an effect image made to correspond to a variable display and a stop display of special symbols. It is a continuous diagram showing the flow of a super reach effect executed during variable display of special symbols. It is a continuous diagram (1/4) partially showing an example of a big win performance executed during a jackpot game. It is a continuous diagram (2/4) partially showing an example of a big win performance executed during a jackpot game. It is a continuous diagram (3/4) partially showing an example of a big win performance executed during a jackpot game. It is a continuous diagram (4/4) partially showing an example of a big win performance executed during a jackpot game. It is a continuous diagram showing an example of stadium mode production (1/10). It is a continuous diagram showing an example of stadium mode production (2/10). It is a continuous diagram showing an example of stadium mode production (3/10). It is a continuous diagram showing an example of stadium mode production (4/10). It is a continuous diagram showing an example of stadium mode production (5/10). It is a continuous diagram showing an example of stadium mode production (6/10). It is a continuous diagram showing an example of stadium mode production (7/10). It is a continuous diagram showing an example of stadium mode production (8/10). It is a continuous diagram showing an example of stadium mode production (9/10). It is a continuous diagram showing an example of stadium mode production (10/10). It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of production control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of working memory performance management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of production design management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of production design variation pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the 2nd special figure time-saving performance management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the 2nd special figure time-saving time latter stage performance management process. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table used in the lottery process before a fluctuation|variation start. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table used in the lottery process before a latter part start. FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating how the performance to be played when the second special symbol is shortened is determined by comparing the normal state, the abnormal state, and a comparative example. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for firing position designation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the process when a variable prize winning device is activated.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter abbreviated as "pachinko machine") 1. As shown in FIG. Further, FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses game balls as a game medium, and players borrow game balls from a game hall operator and play games on the pachinko machine 1. In addition, in the game on the pachinko machine 1, each game ball is a medium that has a game value, and the benefits (profits) that the player enjoys as a result of the game are, for example, the game balls that the player has won. It can be converted into a gaming value based on the number of balls. The overall configuration of the gaming machine will be described below with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2.

[Overall configuration of gaming machine]
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integral door unit 4, and an inner frame assembly 7 (plastic frame, gaming machine frame) as its main body. When viewed from the front facing the player, the integral door unit 4 is located at the frontmost side. An inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (inner side) of the integral door unit 4, and an outer frame unit 2 is arranged so as to surround the outside of the inner frame assembly 7.

The outer frame unit 2 is a structure made by combining wood and metal materials into a vertically elongated rectangular shape. It is fixed using In addition, in the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for parts corresponding to the upper and lower short sides, and metal materials are used for parts corresponding to the left and right long sides.

The integral door unit 4 has a structure in which a saucer unit 6 is integrated at a lower position thereof. The integral door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island equipment via the outer frame unit 2, and each operates in an open/close manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The opening/closing axis of the hinge mechanism (not shown) extends vertically along the left side end when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

A unified locking unit 9 is provided inside the right edge (left edge in FIG. 2) of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. Correspondingly, locking tools (not shown) are also provided on the right edges (back sides) of the integral door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2, respectively. As shown in FIG. 1, when the integral door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side is attached to the integral door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly together with the locking tool. 7 cannot be opened.

Furthermore, a cylinder lock 6a with a keyhole is provided on the right side edge of the saucer unit 6. For example, when a manager of a game center inserts a special key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 is activated and the integrated door unit 4 together with the inner frame assembly 7 can be opened. . When the whole is opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed at the front side.

On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the integral door unit 4 is unlocked while the inner frame assembly 7 remains locked, and the integral door unit 4 can be opened. When the integral door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game hall can remove obstacles such as balls jammed in the board. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the saucer unit 6 is also opened to the front side.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 includes the above game board unit 8 as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the above-mentioned inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integral door unit 4. The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7, for example, with the integral door unit 4 opened to the front side. A vertically oblong window 4a is formed in the center of the integral door unit 4, and a glass unit (no reference numeral) is installed within this window 4a. The glass unit is, for example, a combination of two transparent plates (glass plates) cut to match the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integral door unit 4 via a mounting tool (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface) is formed on the front side of the game board unit 8, and this game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integral door unit 4 is closed, a space is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface into which game balls can flow.

The saucer unit 6 has a shape that projects from the integral door unit 4 toward the front side as a whole, and has an upper tray 6b formed on its upper surface. This upper tray 6b can store game balls lent to players (rental balls) and game balls won by winning (prize balls). Further, in the saucer unit 6, a lower tray 6c is formed at a position below the upper tray 6b. This lower tray 6c stores game balls that are further paid out when the upper tray 6b is full. The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is a so-called CR machine (a model connected to a CR unit), and the game balls borrowed by the player are transferred from the payout device unit 172 on the back side to the tray unit 6 (upper part) separately from the prize balls. It is dispensed onto the tray 6b or lower tray 6c).

A lending operation section 14 is provided on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on this lending operation section 14. When a player operates the ball rental button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a storage IC built-in medium, etc.) inserted into a CR unit (not shown), the number of balls corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 degrees) is (For example, 125 game balls) are lent. For this reason, a frequency display section (not shown) is arranged on the top surface of the lending operation section 14, and the remaining frequency of the valuable medium loaded into the CR unit is displayed on this frequency display section. Note that by operating the return button 12, the player can receive the return of valuable media with remaining credits. In this embodiment, a CR machine is taken as an example, but the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a model not connected to a CR unit) different from the CR machine.

Further, on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, an upper plate ball removal button 6d is installed in front of the upper plate 6b in the upper position, and a lower plate ball removal lever 6e is installed in the center in front of the lower plate 6c. is installed. The player can cause the game balls stored in the upper tray 6b to flow down to the lower tray 6c by pressing the upper tray ball removal button 6d, for example. Furthermore, the player can drop and discharge the game balls stored in the lower tray 6c downward by sliding the lower tray ball extraction lever 6e, for example, to the left. The ejected game balls are received, for example, in a ball receiving box (not shown).

A grip unit 16 is installed at the lower right portion of the saucer unit 6. By operating this grip unit 16, the player can operate the launch control board set 174 and launch (drive) a game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launch device). The fired game ball rises from the lower edge of the game board unit 8 along the left side edge, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (no reference numerals in the figure), etc. are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown game ball flows down inside the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and windmills. Note that the configuration within the gaming area 8a (board surface) will be further described later with reference to other drawings.

[Configuration of the front of the frame]
A left top lens unit 47 and a right top illumination unit 49 are installed in the integrated door unit 4 as components for presentation. Among these, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and the left glass frame decorative lamp 48, and the right upper illumination unit 49 incorporates the right glass frame decorative lamp 50. In addition, left and right glass frame decorative lamps 52 are installed in the integrated door unit 4 so as to be continuous below the left top lens unit 47 and the right top illumination unit 49, respectively. It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the front surface of the saucer unit 6. In the integrated door unit 4, a glass frame top lamp 46, left and right glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, etc. are arranged so as to surround the glass unit (no reference numeral).

The above-mentioned various lamps 46, 48, 50, and 52 perform effects by emitting light (lighting, blinking, change in brightness gradation, change in color tone, etc.) of built-in LEDs, for example. Further, in the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, glass frame speakers 54 and 55 are installed in the left top lens unit 47 and the right top illumination unit 49, respectively. On the other hand, an outer frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. These speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sound effects, BGM, audio, etc. (general sound) to execute the performance.

Further, in the center of the saucer unit 6, a production switching button 45 (operation input receiving means) is installed at a position in front of the upper tray 6b. The effect switching button 45 is, for example, a combination of a push-in circular button and a rotary jog ring (jog dial) around it. By pressing or rotating the performance switching button 45, the player can switch the content of the performance (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42), or change the performance (for example, while the symbols are changing or during a jackpot game). It is possible to generate a preview performance, a definite promotion performance, a promotion performance during a major role, etc.).

[Backside configuration]
As shown in FIG. 2, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 includes a power supply control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a payout device unit 172, a channel unit 173, a firing control board set 174, and a payout control board unit 176. , a back cover unit 178, etc. are installed. In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are various electronic devices (including a control computer not shown) that make up the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), etc. are installed. Note that the electronic devices will be further described later based on another block diagram (FIG. 7).

The main control board unit 170 has a built-in main control device, and a performance display monitor 200 is connected to the main control device. The performance display monitor 200 is disposed on the main control device so as to be visible in the upper left area of the main control board unit 170 when looking at the pachinko machine 1 from the back side, and includes four 7-segment LEDs. Four 7-segment LEDs are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and each 7-segment LED consists of 7 segments that can display decimal Arabic numerals and a dot segment located at the bottom right of the 7 segments. has been done. The performance display monitor 200 is visible through the transparent case covering the main control board unit 170.

The main control device is also provided with a RAM clear switch 304 and a keyhole 306 for setting keys. The RAM clear switch 304 is a switch used to clear the RAM, that is, initialize the RAM (RWM) installed in the main controller, and in this embodiment, it also serves as a switch for changing settings. be done. The setting key keyhole 306 is a keyhole into which a setting key required to change or refer to the settings related to the game of the pachinko machine 1 is inserted. Note that changes in settings will be further described later with reference to other drawings.

The RAM clear switch 304 is provided so as to be depressable through a through hole formed in a transparent case covering the main control board unit 170. Note that the RAM clear switch 304 may be placed outside the transparent case. Further, the setting key keyhole 306 is provided with the key cylinder passing through the transparent case (the transparent case surrounding the key cylinder). Therefore, it is possible to insert and rotate the setting key while the transparent case remains sealed.

Note that the positions of the performance display monitor 200, RAM clear switch 304, and setting key keyhole 306 shown in FIG. 2 are merely examples, and they can be placed at arbitrary positions. Furthermore, the performance display monitor 200, RAM clear switch 304, and setting key keyhole 306 may be provided outside the main control device and connected to the main control device.

The above-mentioned dispensing device unit 172 has, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (no reference numerals), of which the prize ball tank 172a is installed at the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. In this state, game balls supplied from a supply route (not shown) can be stored. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are led to the prize ball case through an upper prize ball gutter (not shown). The channel unit 173 guides the game balls sent out from the payout device unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

The external terminal board 160 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to external electronic equipment (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.), and from this external terminal board 160, the game of the pachinko machine 1 can be Various external information signals representing the progress status, maintenance status, etc. (e.g. prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation number information, jackpot information, starting opening information, etc.) are output to external electronic equipment. ing.

The power cord 164 secures the power (electric power) necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to a power supply device (for example, AC 24V) installed in, for example, an island facility in a game parlor. Further, the ground wire 166 is connected to a ground terminal similarly installed on the island equipment, thereby ensuring the grounding of the pachinko machine 1.

[Board composition]
FIG. 3 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 alone. A relatively large performance unit 40 is arranged in the center of the game area 8a, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left side, a right side, and a lower part with this performance unit 40 as the center. In addition, in the gaming area 8a, around the production unit 40, there is a medium start winning hole 26, a starting gate 20, normal winning holes 22, 25, a variable starting winning device 28 (variable ball entry device), and a first variable winning device 30. , the second variable prize winning device 31, etc. are distributed and installed. Among these, the medium start prize opening 26 is located at the center of the lower part of the gaming area 8a. On the right side of the gaming area 8a (so-called right-handed area), a starting gate 20, a normal winning opening 25, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device 31 are arranged in this order from above. has been done.

The game ball thrown into the game area 8a passes through the starting gate 20 in the process of flowing down, enters (wins) the medium starting prize opening 26, the normal winning openings 22, 25, or enters the opening operation. The ball enters the variable starting winning device 28 at the time, the first variable winning device 30 during the opening operation, and the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation. Here, the game ball flowing down the left side area of the game area 8a may enter the medium starting prize opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22. The game ball flowing down the right side area of the game area 8a passes through the starting gate 20, enters the normal winning hole 25, enters the variable starting winning device 28 during the opening operation, or enters the variable starting winning device 28 during the opening operation. There is a possibility that a ball may enter the first variable winning device 30 or a ball may enter the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation. The game balls that entered the medium start winning hole 26, the normal winning holes 22, 25, the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31 are placed on the game board (the combination that constitutes the game board unit 8). It is collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through a through hole formed in a plate material, transparent plate, etc.).

In this embodiment, the variable start winning device 28 is activated when a predetermined operating condition is met (when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a winning manner), and accordingly the variable start winning device 28 is moved to the right start winning opening 28b. Enables the entry of balls (usually electric accessories). The variable starting winning device 28 has a right starting winning opening 28b that opens toward the front, for example, and a tongue-shaped opening/closing member 28a (movable member) is provided at the lower end position of the right starting winning opening 28b. (so-called ``Bello electric chew''). The opening/closing member 28a reciprocates in the front-back direction of the board surface by the function of a link mechanism using, for example, a solenoid (not shown). That is, the opening/closing member 28a is in the closed position (or non-operating position) in a state where it is retracted to the back of the board surface, and at this time, the right starting prize opening 28b is open to the front side of the board surface, but the game ball is not moved along the opening surface. Since the ball simply flows down, it is difficult for the ball to enter the right starting prize opening 28b (the possibility of the game ball entering the ball is extremely low). On the other hand, when the variable starting winning device 28 operates, the opening/closing member 28a slides (projects) from the back of the board to the front, opening the right starting winning opening 28b (allowing balls to enter). During this time, the variable start winning device 28 is in a state where it is possible to enter the game ball, and the opening/closing member 28a can receive the game ball flowing down along the board surface and cause the ball to enter the right start winning opening 28b. (Variable start winning means). In addition, at this time, the opening/closing member 28a also functions as a member that guides the entry of the game ball into the right starting prize opening 28b. In addition, the arrangement of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 is basically in a manner that does not extremely impede the flow of game balls toward the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning opening 28b when opened). However, the game ball does not always enter the variable starting winning device 28 (right starting winning opening 28b) during the opening operation, and the ball entering occurs randomly. The variable start winning device 28 is opened (operated) for, for example, 0.06 seconds in the non-time reduction state, and is opened for 0.9 seconds in the time reduction state. Even if the opening/closing member 28a protrudes within the opening time of about 0.06 seconds (unless special conditions are applied), most game balls cannot enter the right starting prize opening 28b. On the other hand, if the opening time is about 0.9 seconds (under special conditions), the game ball received by the opening/closing member 28a protruding from the front side of the board can easily enter the right starting prize opening 28b. be. In any case, a lottery opportunity occurs when the ball enters the right start winning hole 28b effectively.

The first variable winning device 30 is activated when a prescribed condition is met (when a special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot format, or when a game ball passes a specific area during a small win game). , allows the ball to enter the first big winning hole 30b (special electric accessory, special winning event generating means). The first variable prize winning device 30 has, for example, one opening/closing member 30a. The opening/closing member 30a is displaced from the closed position toward the open position by the function of a link mechanism using, for example, a solenoid (not shown). As shown in the figure, the opening/closing member 30a is in the closed position (closed state) with the tip facing upward, and at this time, it is difficult for the ball to enter the first grand prize opening 30b (the first grand prize opening 30b is closed). It is. When the first variable winning device 30 operates, the opening/closing member 30a is displaced to the right by using its lower edge portion as a hinge, and opens the first big winning opening 30b (open state). During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state where game balls can flow in, and the event of a ball entering the first big winning hole 30b can occur. In addition, at this time, the opening/closing member 30a also functions as a member that guides the inflow of game balls into the first big prize opening 30b. The arrangement of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 is basically such that it does not extremely impede the flow of the game ball toward the first variable prize winning device 30 (the first big prize opening 30b when activated). However, the game ball does not always enter the first variable prize winning device 30 during operation, and the ball entering occurs randomly.

The second variable winning device 31 operates when a special condition is met (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small winning mode) and enables the ball to enter the second big winning hole 31b ( (Special electric accessory, second special winning event generating means). Note that the second variable winning device 31 may be activated when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode.

The second variable winning device 31 is a device placed on the right side of the production unit 40, and includes, for example, one opening/closing member 31a. The first variable winning device 30 described above employs a type of device (single-winged tulip-type attacker) in which the opening/closing member 30a collapses to the right; It uses a type of device that slides inside the board surface (sliding type attacker). The opening/closing member 31a reciprocates back and forth with respect to the board surface by the function of a link mechanism using, for example, a solenoid (not shown). The opening/closing member 31a is in a closed position (closed state) in a state where it protrudes from the board surface toward the player, and at this time, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening/closing member 31a, so it enters the second grand prize opening 31b. It is difficult to enter the ball (the second grand prize opening 31b is closed). When the second variable winning device 31 operates, the opening/closing member 31a is drawn into the board surface and opens the second big winning opening 31b (open state). During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state where it is not difficult for the game ball to flow in, and it is possible to cause the event of the ball entering the second big winning hole 31b.

[Specific area]
Further, inside the second variable winning device 31, a specific area 31x is provided. The specific area 31x is an area where it is difficult for the game ball to pass when the second variable winning device 31 is in the closed state, and the specific area slide member 31c is an area where the second variable winning device 31 is in the open state. This is the area through which the game ball can pass when it is pulled into the board. The details of the second variable winning device 31 will be described later.

Further, although not particularly illustrated, the second variable prize winning device 31 (opening/closing member 31a) may be provided with a game ball rolling speed reducing portion that reduces the speed at which the game ball rolls. The game ball rolling speed reduction part is made by making the slope of the opening/closing member 31a gentler or by forming alternately protruding protrusions on the opening/closing member 31a at positions through which the game balls pass in order to make the game balls advance in a zigzag pattern. It can be realized. This allows many game balls to enter the second variable winning device 31 during the small winning game.

In addition, an out port 32 is formed in the game area 8a, and game balls that do not win are finally collected through the out port 32 to the back side of the game board unit 8. In addition, the medium start winning hole 26, the normal winning hole 22, 25, the variable starting winning device 28 (right starting winning hole 28b), the first variable winning device 30 (first big winning hole 30b), the second variable winning device 31 ( All the game balls hit into the game area 8a, including the game balls that entered the second big prize opening 31b (specific area), are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 to the outside of the frame through an out passage assembly (not shown), and further join the supply route of the island equipment (not shown).

4 and 5 are diagrams showing details of the second variable winning device 31.
In the second variable winning device 31, a second big winning opening 31b is arranged below a sliding opening/closing member 31a. The inside of the second big prize opening 31b slopes downward to the left, and a passage extends downward at the left end. A second count switch 85 is arranged in the passage extending downward, and the second count switch 85 counts the number of game balls that have entered the second variable winning device 31.

The passage extending downward splits into two routes at the end. One first passage 31d continues downward, and the other second passage 31e branches to the left.
A specific area slide member 31c is arranged in the first passage 31d, and a specific area 31x is arranged downstream of the first passage 31d. Note that a specific area switch (not shown) is arranged inside the specific area 31x.
On the other hand, no special member is arranged in the second passage 31e, and a discharge hole 31y is arranged downstream of the second passage 31e.

The specific area slide member 31c is activated when a special condition is met (after the second variable winning device 31 is activated, after the first time has elapsed and before the second time has elapsed), and the slide member 31c for the specific area is activated. Allows game balls to pass through. The specific area slide member 31c slides along the front-back direction of the board surface by the function of a link mechanism using, for example, a specific area solenoid (not shown). For example, after the first time elapses, it is 0.2 seconds after the second variable winning device 31 is activated, and after the second time elapses, it is 1.8 seconds after the second variable winning device 31 activates. After the passage of time.

When the specific area solenoid is in the OFF state, the specific area slide member 31c blocks the first passage 31d, making it difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area 31x. On the other hand, when the specific area solenoid is turned on, the specific area slide member 31c is pulled into the board surface, making it easier for the game ball to pass through the specific area 31x.

Next, the operation of the second variable prize winning device 31 will be explained.
As shown in (A) in FIG. 4, the sliding opening/closing member 31a has been pulled inside the board surface, and the game ball has entered the second grand prize opening 31b. In the illustrated example, four game balls are advancing toward the second grand prize opening 31b. Here, the state is immediately before the first game ball is detected by the second count switch 85.

As shown in (B) in FIG. 4, the first game ball has reached the specific area slide member 31c. The second and third game balls are advancing toward the second count switch 85. The fourth game ball is about to enter the second grand prize opening 31b.

As shown in (C) in FIG. 4, at this point, the specific area slide member 31c has not been pulled inward (because it is inactive), so the first game ball is moved by the specific area slide member 31c. The traveling direction is changed to the left by the member 31c, and the vehicle travels through the second passage 31e. In this case, the first game ball is collected by the discharge hole 31y.

As shown in (D) in FIG. 5, it is assumed that the specific area slide member 31c is pulled into the inside of the board at this point (in operation). In this case, the second game ball passes through the front side of the specific area slide member 31c and advances to the first passage 31d. Then, the second game ball passes through the specific area 31x and is detected by the specific area switch.

As shown in (E) in FIG. 5, the third game ball also passes through the front side of the specific area slide member 31c and advances to the first passage 31d. In this case, the third game ball passes through the specific area 31x and is detected by the specific area switch.

As shown in (F) in FIG. 5, at this point, it is assumed that the operation of the specific area slide member 31c has ended and the specific area slide member 31c has protruded to the front side of the board surface. In this case, the fourth game ball is guided to the left by the specific area slide member 31c and advances to the second passage 31e. Then, the fourth game ball is collected through the discharge hole 31y.

FIG. 6 is an enlarged front view of a part of the game board unit 8 (lower left position within the window 4a).
The game board unit 8 is provided with a normal symbol display device 33 (normal symbol display means) and a normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a at the lower right position in the window 4a, for example, and a first special symbol display device 34 (a first special symbol display device 34). 1 special symbol display means), a second special symbol display device 35 (second special symbol display means), a first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, a second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a, and a game state display device 38. There is.

Among these, the normal symbol display device 33 displays the normal symbols in a variable manner by, for example, alternately lighting two lamps (LEDs), and then displays the normal symbols in a static manner by lighting or extinguishing the lamps. The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a displays the memorized number of 0 to 4 by, for example, a combination of two lamps (LEDs) turning off, turning on, and blinking. For example, in a display mode in which both lamps are turned off, the number of memories is 0, and in a display mode in which one lamp is turned on, the number of memories is 1, and in a display mode in which the same one lamp is blinking, the number of memories is 1. In a display mode where the number of memories is 2, and one lamp is blinking and the other lamp is lit, the number of memories is 3, and in a display mode where both lamps are blinking, the number of memories is 4. For example, display the number of items. Although two lamps (LEDs) are used here, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a may be configured using four lamps (LEDs). In this case, the number of working memories can be displayed by the number of lit lamps.

Each time a game ball passes through the starting gate 20, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a changes to the display mode after increasing by one in order to remember that the passage that triggers the operation lottery has occurred. (up to a maximum of 4), and each time the passage of the normal symbol starts to change, the display mode changes one by one to the display mode after the symbol decreases. In addition, in this embodiment, when the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a is not lit (memory number is 0), the game ball passes through the starting gate 20 in a state where the normal symbol can already start changing (when the stop display is displayed). However, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of memories (maximum 4) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a represents the number of passes in which the variation of the normal symbol has not yet started at that time.

Further, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 can display the fluctuating state and stop state of the special symbol using, for example, a 7-segment LED (with dots) (symbol display means, first symbol display means, second symbol display means). In addition, the special symbol display devices 34 and 35 may have a configuration in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, in a circular shape).

In addition, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a each have 0 to 4 lights, depending on the display mode consisting of, for example, a combination of two lamps (LEDs) turning off, turning on, and blinking. Displays the number of memories (memory number display means). For example, in a display mode in which both lamps are turned off, the number of memories is 0, and in a display mode in which one lamp is turned on, the number of memories is 1, and in a display mode in which the same one lamp is blinking, the number of memories is 0. In a display mode where the number of memories is 2, and one lamp is blinking and the other lamp is lit, the number of memories is 3, and in a display mode where both lamps are blinking, the number of memories is displayed. For example, four items are displayed.

Each time a game ball enters the medium-start winning slot 26, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a changes to the display mode after increasing by one to remember that the ball has entered. (up to a maximum of 4), and each time the special symbols start changing with the arrival of the ball, the display mode changes one by one to a state after the number of special symbols decreases. In addition, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is set one by one each time a game ball enters the variable starting winning device 28 (right starting winning opening 28b) in order to remember that the ball has entered the ball. The display mode changes to the display mode after the increase (up to 4 symbols), and each time the change of special symbols starts with the entry of the ball as a trigger, the display mode changes one by one to the display mode after the decrease. In addition, in this embodiment, when the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the first special symbol is already in a state where it can start changing (when the stop display is displayed) and the medium start winning hole 26 Even if a game ball enters the ball, the display mode does not change. In addition, when the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the variable start winning device 28 (right start prize opening Even if a game ball enters 28b), the display mode does not change. In other words, the number of memories (maximum 4) represented by the display mode of each special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, 35a is the number of incoming balls for which fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not yet started at that time. It represents the number of times.

Further, the game state display device 38 includes six LEDs corresponding to, for example, jackpot type display lamps 38a, 38b, time saving state display lamp 38e, and firing position designation display lamp 38f (information display means). In addition, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned normal symbol display device 33, normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special The symbol operation memory lamp 35a and the game status display device 38 are mounted on a single integrated display board 89 and attached to the game board unit 8.

These LED lamps mounted on the integrated display board 89 are divided into four different control areas (hereinafter referred to as "common") for the purpose of controlling switching on or off. Looking at it from a different perspective, there are four commons on the integrated display board 89, and each lamp belongs to one of the commons. In this embodiment, a dynamic lighting method is adopted, and the lamps are sequentially driven in common units at intervals of an interrupt period (for example, 4 ms). Therefore, all the lamps mounted on the integrated display board 89 are not driven at the same time.

[Other configurations of the game board: see Figure 3]
The above-mentioned production unit 40 has an upper edge 40a which functions as a guide member for changing the direction of flow of the game ball, and also has various decorative parts 40b and 40c inside thereof. The decorative parts 40b and 40c enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 due to their three-dimensional shape, and can perform dramatic movements by, for example, emitting transmitted light from a built-in light emitting device (such as an LED). . In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed on the inside upper part of the production unit 40, and this liquid crystal display 42 displays production symbols (main symbols) corresponding to special symbols, fourth symbols, Various effects images are displayed, including memory markers (pending display). In this way, the game board unit 8 impresses the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 on the player based on the configuration of the board surface (the design of the cell board, not shown) and the decorativeness of the performance unit 40.

Further, a ball guide passage 40d is formed on the left side edge of the production unit 40. The ball guide passage 40d passes through the back side of the production unit 40 and is connected to the lower rolling stage 40e. The ball guide passage 40d opens diagonally upward to the left within the game area 8a, and when a game ball flowing down within the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide passage 40d, it passes through the inside and rolls. It is released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface, and the game ball can freely roll in the left and right direction here. The game ball rolling on the rolling stage 40e eventually flows down into the lower gaming area 8a. A ball release path 40k is formed in the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the game balls guided from the rolling stage 40e to the ball release path 40k easily flow into the medium start prize opening 26 located directly below it. .

In addition, inside the upper center of the presentation unit 40, a movable body 40f for presentation (for example, a heart-shaped decoration) and a driving source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) (not shown) are attached. The movable body 40f for performance can perform a performance involving the movement of a tangible object in addition to a performance using an image on the liquid crystal display 42 or a performance using a light emitting device. The effect using such a movable body 40f can have a different appeal than the effect using a two-dimensional image.

[Control configuration]
Next, a configuration related to control of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices installed in the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a main control device 70 (main control computer) that serves as the center of control operations, and this main control device 70 mainly has the function of controlling the progress of games in the pachinko machine 1. There is. Note that the main control device 70 is built into the main control board unit 170 described above.

The main control device 70 is also equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72, which is a central processing unit, is mounted, and the main control CPU 72 has a ROM 74, a RAM ( It is configured as an LSI that integrates semiconductor memories such as RWM) 76 and the like. The main controller 70 is also equipped with a random number generator 75 and a sampling circuit 77. Among these, the random number generator 75 generates hardware random numbers (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for determining the jackpot in the special symbol lottery and the hit determination in the regular symbol lottery. is input to the main control CPU 72 through the sampling circuit 77. In addition, the main controller 70 includes a RAM clear switch 304 for initializing all areas of the RAM 76 except for prohibited areas, an input/output (I/O) port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), a counter/ It is equipped with peripheral ICs such as a timer circuit (CTC), and these are mounted on the circuit board together with the main control CPU 72. Note that a signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or the inner layer portion).

Further, the main control device 70 is provided with a setting change device 300 and a setting key switch 302. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) changes settings by operating the setting change device 300. The setting change device 300 is a device for changing settings (at least settings related to the probability of winning a special symbol lottery), and is activated by operating a RAM clear switch 304 or the like provided in the pachinko machine 1. Moreover, setting refers to a combination of operation probabilities. Furthermore, the activation probability refers to the probability that a combination of special symbols will be displayed that will cause the condition device to operate (that will cause a jackpot game to be executed). The setting key switch 302 is an input device that inputs a signal (ON/OFF) indicating the rotation state of the setting key as the setting key is rotated, which is essential for switching settings. Various methods can be used to change the settings, and for example, the settings can be changed using the following steps.

(1) First, turn off the power of the pachinko machine 1.
(2) Next, open the door of Pachinko machine 1 with the special key (door key). Specifically, the dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 6a and rotated to the right to open the integral door unit 4 together with the inner frame assembly 7.
(3) On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a setting key keyhole 306 for inserting the setting key and a RAM clear switch 304 are provided, so insert the setting key into the setting key keyhole 306 and set the setting key. Rotate the key to the right.
(4) Then, turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1.

(5) As a result, a signal (ON) indicating that the setting key has been rotated to the change position is input by the setting key switch 302, and the setting can be changed based on this input signal. At this time, a safety lock is applied by a locking mechanism (not shown). Therefore, the setting key cannot be removed unless it is returned to its original position.

Here, if the power is turned on while turning the setting key clockwise and the RAM clear switch 304 is turned on, the settings will be changed. On the other hand, if the power is turned on without turning on the RAM clear switch 304 while the setting key is rotated to the right, the settings can be referenced.

(6) In a state where the settings can be changed, by pressing the RAM clear switch 304 an arbitrary number of times, the settings can be changed to any one of a plurality of predetermined stages.
The set value can be displayed on, for example, a dedicated 7-segment LED, the gaming status display device 38 (special symbol display device, etc.), and the performance display monitor 200.

(7) In the case of a slot machine, when the desired setting is reached, a lever ON process is required, but since Pachinko machine 1 does not have a lever, an alternative process (for example, pressing the setting key to the left) (a process of rotating in a direction, a process of turning on a setting change confirmation button (not shown), etc.), or a process of turning on the lever may be omitted. In this embodiment, when the desired setting is reached, the setting key is rotated counterclockwise to return it to its original position. By this operation, a signal (OFF) indicating that the setting key has been returned to its original position is inputted by the setting key switch 302, and the setting change is confirmed based on this input signal.

(8) When the setting change is confirmed, the setting key can be removed from the setting key keyhole 306. Further, when the setting change is confirmed, if the setting value is displayed on the dedicated 7-segment LED, the gaming status display device 38, or the performance display monitor 200, the display disappears.
(9) Finally, close the door of Pachinko machine 1. This completes changing the settings. Once the settings have been changed, normal gaming begins.

When the setting is changed, the main control CPU 72 stores the changed setting value in the setting value buffer of the RAM 76. The settings buffer can be a memory area that is backed up.

Note that here, the configuration is such that the settings are changed to one of the stages by pressing the RAM clear switch 304, but instead of using the RAM clear switch 304 for changing the settings, it is also possible to provide a separate dedicated setting change switch. Good too. In this case, in step (6) above, the separately provided setting change switch is pressed an arbitrary number of times.

The starting gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting passage of a game ball. The game board unit 8 also includes a middle start winning port switch 80 and a right start winning port corresponding to the middle start winning port 26, the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively. A switch 82, a first count switch 84 and a second count switch 85 are provided. Each starting winning hole switch 80, 82 is for detecting the winning of a game ball to the starting winning hole 26 and the variable starting winning device 28 (right starting winning hole 28b). Further, the count switch 84 is for detecting winning of game balls into the first variable winning device 30 (first big winning opening 30b) and counting the number. Furthermore, the second count switch 85 is for detecting winning of game balls into the second variable winning device 31 (second big winning opening 31b) and counting the number.

In addition, a specific area switch 83 is provided corresponding to the specific area 31x. A specific area switch 83 is provided at a position corresponding to the specific area 31x inside the second big prize opening 31b, and the specific area switch 83 detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x.

Similarly, the game board unit 8 is equipped with a winning hole switch 86 that detects winning of game balls into the normal winning holes 22 and 25. In addition, here, a configuration in which a common winning port switch 86 is used for all the normal winning ports 22 and 25 is taken as an example, but for example, separate winning port switches 86 are installed on the left and right sides of the board, and the winning port on the left side The switch 86 detects winning of the game ball to the normal winning openings 22, 25 located on the left side of the board, and the winning opening switch 86 on the right side detects winning of the gaming ball to the normal winning opening 25 located on the right side of the board. You can also use it as

In any case, winning detection signals and passing detection signals from these switches 80, 82, 83, 84, 85, and 86 are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input/output driver (not shown). Note that due to the configuration of the game board unit 8, in this embodiment, the winning detection signal and passing detection signal from the gate switch 78, specific area switch 83, count switch 84, and winning opening switch 86 are transmitted via the panel relay terminal board 87. The panel relay terminal board 87 is provided with wiring patterns, connection terminals, etc. for relaying each winning detection signal.

The above-mentioned normal symbol display device 33, normal symbol working memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol working memory lamp 34a, second special symbol working memory lamp 35a and game The display operation of the status display device 38 is controlled based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals to these display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. In addition, these display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 while being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above. Control signals are transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the display board 89 via the panel relay terminal board 87 described above.

Further, a performance display monitor 200 is connected to the main controller 70 via a panel relay terminal board 87. The performance display monitor 200 displays the number of prize balls paid out when game balls enter each winning hole (starting winning hole, normal winning hole), and the number of outs (out switch) indicating the number of game balls fired into the gaming area. This is a monitor for displaying the base calculated by dividing by the number of game balls detected (99). The base is calculated for each preset section using an area (unused area) that is different from the used area used to control the progress of the game, and the base of the current section and the base of the previous section are , are switched and displayed at preset intervals. The display operation of the performance display monitor 200 is controlled based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs a control signal to the performance display monitor 200 according to the base calculation situation, and controls the lighting state of each of the seven segments.

Although the performance display monitor 200 is described as being connected to the main controller 70 via the panel relay terminal board 87, it may also be connected to the main controller 70 without using the panel relay terminal board 87. , a performance display monitor 200 may be arranged as an internal configuration of the main control device 70.

In addition, the game board unit 8 includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 88 and a first grand prize opening solenoid corresponding to the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the specific area 31x, respectively. 90, a second big prize opening solenoid 97 and a specific area solenoid 99 are provided. These solenoids 88, 90, 97, and 99 operate (excite) based on control signals from the main control CPU 72, and are respectively variable start winning device 28, first variable winning device 30, second variable winning device 31, and specific area 31x. open and close. Note that control signals are also transmitted to these solenoids 88, 90, 97, and 99 from the main control CPU 72 via the panel relay terminal board 87 described above.

In addition, a glass frame release switch 91 is installed on the integral door unit 4, and a plastic frame release switch 93 is installed on the inner frame assembly 7. When the integral door unit 4 is opened independently, a contact signal from the glass frame release switch 91 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72), and the inner frame assembly 7 is opened from the outer frame unit 2. Then, a contact signal from the plastic frame release switch 93 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the integral door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. Note that when the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the integral door unit 4 or the inner frame assembly 7, it generates a door open information signal as the above-mentioned external information signal.

A payout control device 92 is installed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (special benefit granting means). This payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which a payout control CPU 94 is mounted, and the payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI integrated with a CPU core (not shown) and semiconductor memories such as a ROM 96 and a RAM 98. It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as the above-mentioned external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

A payout device board 100 is installed together with a payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor) in a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, and a drive circuit for the payout motor 102 is provided on this payout device board 100. There is. The payout device board 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94), and pays out the specified number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let it come out. The paid-out game balls are sent to the above-mentioned tray unit 6 through the payout channel in the channel unit 173.

Further, for example, a payout road ball cut-off switch 104 is installed at an upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout count switch 106 is installed at a downstream position of the payout motor 102. When a prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a count signal from the payout counting switch 106 is input to the payout device board 100 each time. Further, when a ball is out at an upstream position of the prize ball case, a contact signal from the payout road ball out switch 104 is input to the payout device board 100. The payout device board 100 transmits the input count signal and contact signal to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual number of payouts and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device board 100.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, a full tank switch 161 is installed, for example, inside the lower tray 6c (in a position at the back when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The actually paid out prize balls (game balls) are discharged into the upper tray 6b through the above-mentioned channel unit 173, but when the upper tray 6b is full of game balls, any more game balls that are paid out are As described above, it flows into the lower tray 6c. Further, when the lower tray 6c becomes full with game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned on and a full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, even if the payout control CPU 94 receives the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, it temporarily suspends any further prize ball operations and stores the remaining number of unpaid prize balls in the RAM 98. Furthermore, the memory in the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is cut off, so even if a power outage (including momentary power outage) occurs during a game, the information on the number of remaining prize balls that have not been paid out will not be lost. .

Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing solenoid 110 is installed together with a firing control board 108. Further, a ball feeding solenoid 111 is provided within the saucer unit 6. The launch control board 108, the launch solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the launch control board set 174 described above, and the launch control board 108 is provided with a drive circuit for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Of these, the ball feeding solenoid 111 performs an operation to feed the game balls stored in the tray unit 6 one by one to a predetermined shooting position within the shooting machine case. Further, the firing solenoid 110 performs an operation of hitting the game balls sent out to the firing position and continuously (intermittently) firing the game balls one by one toward the game area 8a as described above. Note that the game balls are fired at intervals of, for example, about 0.6 seconds (within 100 balls per minute).

On the other hand, the grip unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Of these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the amount of operation (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. Furthermore, the touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the grip unit 16 (firing handle) from a change in capacitance, and outputs a detection signal. The firing stop switch 116 generates a firing stop signal (contact signal) in response to the player's operation.

A firing relay terminal board 118 is installed in the saucer unit 6, and signals from the firing lever volume 112, touch sensor 114, and firing stop switch 116 are sent to the firing control board 108 via the firing relay terminal board 118. sent to. Further, a drive signal from the firing control board 108 is applied to the ball feeding solenoid 111 via the firing relay terminal board 118. When the player operates the firing handle, an analog signal (an encoded digital signal may be used) is generated by the firing lever volume 112 according to the amount of operation, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. Thereby, the strength with which the game ball is launched is adjusted according to the amount of operation by the player. Note that the drive circuit of the firing control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when a firing stop signal is input from the firing stop switch 116. do. In addition, a game ball rental device connection terminal board 120 is connected to the firing relay terminal board 118, and when the above-mentioned CR unit is not connected to the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120, the firing relay terminal board 118 is also connected to the The drive circuit of control board 108 stops driving firing solenoid 110 .

Further, the saucer unit 6 has a built-in frequency display board 122 and a loan/return switch board 123. Among these, the power display board 122 is provided with a display (7 segment LED for 3 digits) of the power display section described above. Further, switch modules connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12, respectively, are mounted on the lending and return switch board 123, and when the ball lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is sent to the lending/returning button 12. and is transmitted from the return switch board 123 to the CR unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120. Further, from the CR unit, a frequency signal indicating the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted to the frequency display board 122 via the gaming ball etc. rental device connection terminal board 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display board 122 drives a display based on the frequency signal, and numerically displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium. In addition, if no valuable medium is loaded into the CR unit, or if the remaining count of the loaded valuable medium is 0, the display circuit of the rate display board 122 drives the display to display a demonstration (valuable medium It is also possible to display a display prompting the user to input

Moreover, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a production control device 124 (computer for production control) as a control configuration. This performance control device 124 controls the performance accompanying the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. The production control device 124 is also equipped with a production control CPU 126, which is a central processing unit, on a circuit board (composite sub-control board). The performance control CPU 126 is configured as an LSI that includes a CPU core (not shown) and semiconductor memories such as a RAM (RWM) 130 and a control ROM 180. Note that the performance control device 124 is provided at a position covered by a back cover unit 178 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the production control device 124 is equipped with various functional components necessary for realizing production, such as a VDP 152, a driver IC 132, and an audio IC 134. Among these, the VDP 152 is a processor for drawing an effect screen to be played on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The driver IC 132 is equipped with an IC that controls devices such as the lamps 46 to 52, the board lamp 53, and the movable motor 57. Furthermore, the audio IC 134 controls driving of the speakers 54, 55, and 56. Note that the internal functional configuration of the production control device 124 will be described in detail later using another diagram.

The production control device 124 and the above-mentioned main control device 70 are interconnected, for example, via a communication harness (not shown). However, communication between them is performed only in one direction from the main control device 70 to the production control device 124, and communication in the opposite direction is not performed. In addition, a parallel format may be adopted for the communication harness depending on the bus width of various commands (hereinafter referred to as "performance commands") sent from the main control device 70 to the production control device 124. However, a serial format may be adopted depending on the hardware configuration of each driver (I/O).

In this embodiment, a sub-connection board 136 is installed on the inner surface of the integrated door unit 4, and drive signals from the driver IC 132 and audio IC 134 are transmitted to various lamps 46 to 52, speakers 54, 55, 56. Further, in addition to the above-mentioned performance switching button 45 and jog dial 45a, a volume adjustment switch (not shown) is connected to the sub-connection board 136, and when the player operates these operating members, the contact signals are sent to the sub-connection. It is input to the production control device 124 through the board 136. Although an example is given here in which each of the operation members 45, 45a is connected to the sub-connection board 136, when installing a saucer illumination board, each operation member 45, 45a is connected to the saucer illumination board. Good too.

In addition, a driver board 138 is installed in the game board unit 8, and a movable body motor 57 is connected to this driver board 138 in addition to the board lamp 53. The movable body motor 57 drives the movable body 40f via, for example, a link mechanism (not shown). A drive signal from the driver IC 132 is applied to the panel lamp 53 and the movable body motor 57 via the driver board 138, respectively. Note that the movable body motor 57 may be a solenoid.

The liquid crystal display 42 described above is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and its display screen is visible through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and this inverter board 158 generates AC power that is applied to the backlight (for example, cold cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42.

Additionally, a power control unit 162 (power control means) is installed on the back side of the inner frame assembly 7. This power supply control unit 162 has a built-in switching power supply circuit, and when it takes in external power (for example, AC 24V, etc.) from the island equipment through the power cord 164, it can generate necessary power (for example, DC +34V, +12V, etc.) from there. The power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70, payout control device 92, production control device 124, and inverter board 158. Furthermore, power is supplied to the firing control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and power is also supplied to the CR unit via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 120. Note that low voltage power (for example, DC +5V) for logic is generated by a power supply IC (such as a three-terminal regulator) built into each device. Further, as described above, the power supply control unit 162 is grounded to the island equipment through the ground wire 166.

The external terminal board 160 described above is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) are sent to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control device 92. It is output from the outside. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output external information signals to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal board 160. The signals output from the external terminal board 160 are compiled by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) in a game hall. Although a configuration in which the external information signal is routed through the payout control device 92 is exemplified here, a configuration in which the external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal board 160 may also be used.

[Internal configuration of production control device]
FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing the internal functional configuration of the production control device 124.
As described above, the performance control device 124 has the role of a performance control processor that controls the performance as the game progresses. Therefore, the production control device 124 is equipped with a control ROM 180 and a watchdog timer IC (WDTIC) 188, which are necessary for the production control device 124 to function as a production control processor, in addition to the production control CPU 126. The control ROM 180 stores basic programs related to control of effects. The performance control CPU 126 accesses the control ROM 180 via a CPU bus (not shown) and controls the performance by executing a program stored in the control ROM 180. The watchdog timer IC 188 is a timer that monitors whether the control executed by the production control device 124 is being performed normally (whether the processing is completed within the expected time), and is connected to the reset terminal of the production control CPU 126. There is. If the signal (clear pulse) for clearing the monitoring timer of the watchdog timer IC 188 is not input within a predetermined time, the watchdog timer IC 188 outputs a signal (reset pulse) for starting the reset to the production control CPU 126. do. As a result, the production control device 124 is forcibly reset and activated.

In addition to these functions, the production control device 124 also has functions related to production, such as an SRAM 182 that is a storage area for backup data, a crystal oscillator 181 that generates a clock signal of a predetermined frequency, and a real-time clock (RTC) 184 that performs time management. , a lithium battery 186 that supplies backup power to the SRAM 182 and real-time clock 184, and peripheral ICs such as input/output drivers and counter/timer circuits (not shown). The lithium battery 186 stores this power and charges itself while driving power is being supplied from the power supply control unit 162 to the production control device 124. The SRAM 182 and the real-time clock 184 are connected to a lithium battery 186, and can be driven by the lithium battery 186 when the supply of drive power from the power supply control unit 162 to the performance control device 124 is cut off. Therefore, even if the power supply from the power supply control unit 162 is cut off, the SRAM 182 and the real-time clock 184 continue to operate until the lithium battery 186 runs out of charge (for example, about one and a half months). The SRAM 182 can retain stored information for a while even in a power-off situation.

The production control program is configured to store information regarding security, monitoring, malfunctions, etc. that should not be easily erased in the SRAM 182. As a result, for example, if some kind of malfunction occurs in the performance control device 124, the pachinko machine 1 can be recovered (or inspected in the installed state), and the cause of the malfunction can be investigated by analyzing the information held in the SRAM 182. becomes possible.

Normally, devices such as the liquid crystal display 42, various lamps 46 to 53, speakers 54, 55, 56, etc. are used to control the effects that the effect control CPU 126 executes according to the program stored in the control ROM 180. Includes control over the performance. Broadly speaking, the flow of this production control can be divided into two stages: "overall control (playback instructions)" and "individual control (playback control)." The production control CPU 126 first receives a production command transmitted from the main control device 70, and indirectly instructs each device to reproduce a production according to the contents of the production command (overall control). Next, the production control CPU 126 generates instruction data that converts the instruction content into more specific expressions suitable for each device, and each control device 134, 152, 198, 199 relays between the production control CPU 126 and each device. (individual control). As a result, each control device 134, 152, 198, 199 controls each device based on the instruction data, and the performance playback (screen display, audio output, lamp emission, movable body displacement) using each device in the pachinko machine 1 is performed. etc.) are realized.

In this way, the performance control CPU 126 has different functions depending on the stage of performance control, and these functions are realized by properly using the resources of the performance control CPU 126. In FIG. 8, the internal resources of the production control CPU 126 are divided into several functional blocks: a production control section 210, a display control section 220, an audio control section 222, a lamp control section 224, a motor control section 226, and an input control section 228. , a time management unit (ACT) 230, and the like. In the following description, each functional block will be treated as an operating entity of control processing.

First, at the stage of overall control, the performance control section 210 in the performance control CPU 126 becomes the main operating body, and controls the flow of the entire performance using a time management section (ACT) 230 that manages the time progression of the performance. In addition, at the stage of individual control, the display control section 220, audio control section 222, lamp control section 224, motor control section 226, or input control section 228 in the production control CPU 126 is the main operating body depending on the device to be controlled. becomes. In addition, it is good also as a structure in which the production control part 210 directly controls each control device 134, 152, 198, 199, etc.

The production control device 124 functions as a production control processor at the stage of overall control, whereas it functions as a production reproduction processor at the stage of individual control. Therefore, the production control device 124 further includes a circuit board (production display control board) on which the VDP 152 is mounted, a CGROM (image/audio ROM) 190, and an audio IC 134 for controlling various devices used for reproduction of production. It is equipped with an LED driver 198, an SMC (serial control controller) 199, and a driver IC 132.

The CGROM 190 stores drawing materials (moving image data) constituting the performance screen and audio materials (sound data) that are output as the performance progresses, compressed using a predetermined compression algorithm. The CGROM 190 is connected to the VDP 152 and audio IC 134 via a CG bus (not shown).

The VDP 152 is a processor dedicated to drawing performance images, and is integrated into a single chip together with the performance control CPU 126. Further, the VDP 152 includes a VRAM 156 and a drawing material decoder 157. Of these, the VRAM 156 is mainly used when expanding drawing materials, and the drawing material decoder 157 is used when decompressing (decoding) compressed drawing materials. The VDP 152 first analyzes the instruction content sent from the display control unit 220, reads out necessary drawing materials from the CGROM 190 via the CG bus, and transfers them to the VRAM 156. Then, the drawn drawing material that has been read out is decoded by a drawing material decoder 157 to draw an effect image on the VRAM 156, and the effect image is developed into a frame buffer for each frame (still image per unit time). By individually driving each pixel (full color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 based on the buffered image data, reproduction of the effect screen is realized.

The audio IC 134 is a sound generator that generates sounds such as sound effects and BGM to be played during execution of the performance, and is integrated into a single chip with the performance control CPU 126 like the VDP 152. The audio IC 134 is connected to an amplifier (not shown), an external DRAM, and a CG bus. Furthermore, the audio IC 134 has a built-in audio material decoder 135 that decompresses (decodes) compressed audio materials. The audio IC 134 first analyzes the contents of the instruction transmitted from the audio control unit 222, and reads necessary audio materials from the CGROM 190 via the CG bus. Then, the read audio material is decoded using the audio material decoder 135 on the external DRAM. By outputting the decoded audio to the glass frame speakers 54, 55 and the outer frame speaker 56 via an amplifier, stereo 2ch or monaural 2ch audio reproduction (a larger number of channels may be used) is realized. Furthermore, the audio IC 134 adjusts the output volume of each speaker 54, 55, 56 based on a contact signal input when the volume adjustment switch is operated.

The LED driver 198 controls the lighting pattern and brightness pattern of various lamps 46 to 53 provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 in accordance with execution of effects. The LED driver 198 employs an addressing synchronous serial method. The LED driver 198 first controls the lighting pattern and brightness pattern based on the instruction content sent from the lamp control unit 224, and transfers the corresponding drive data to the driver IC 132.

The SMC 199 controls the drive pattern of the movable body motor 57 that serves as a drive source for the performance movable body 40f provided inside the performance unit 40. The SMC 199 is also integrated into one chip with the production control CPU 126. The SMC199 uses a clock synchronous serial method. The SMC 199 first generates a drive pattern based on the instruction content sent from the motor control unit 226, and transfers this to the driver IC 132. Note that here, the SMC199 is used only to generate drive patterns for the motor, but since the SMC199 can also generate lighting patterns and brightness patterns for not only motors but also lamps, the SMC199 is applied in place of the LED driver 198 described above. However, it is also possible to configure the SMC 199 to generate data patterns for both lamps and motors.

The driver IC 132 controls the drive voltage applied to the lamp and motor based on drive data transferred from the LED driver 198 and SMC 199. The driver IC 132 includes a switching element such as a PWM (pulse width modulation) IC or a MOSFET (not shown), and switches (or switches the duty) the drive voltages applied to the various lamps 46 to 53 and the movable motor 57. By managing these operations, it is possible to realize performance playback using lamps and movable objects. In addition to the glass frame top lamp 46 and the glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, the various lamps include light sources built into each part of the operation unit 60 and decorative/presentation lamps installed in the game board unit 8. A panel lamp 53 is included. The board lamp 53 corresponds to the LED built in the production unit 40, the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, etc.

In addition, the driver IC 132 transfers a contact signal input when a player operates an operation member such as the performance switching button 45 or the jog dial 45a to the performance control unit 210 via the input control unit 228. The production control unit 210 appropriately changes the content of the production to be played based on the content of the transferred contact signal.

The above is an example of the configuration regarding control of the pachinko machine 1.

[Relationship between settings and winning probability of special symbol lottery]
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing the relationship between the settings and the winning probability of the special symbol lottery.

In this embodiment, two types of settings are provided.
When the current setting is "Setting 1", the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (low probability state) is "1/320". Further, when the current setting is "Setting 6", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/200". In this way, the larger the setting value is, the higher the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (low probability state) is set, which becomes an advantageous situation for the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the probability state does not change regarding the special symbol lottery, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery (high probability state) is the same as the winning probability of the special symbol lottery (low probability state). Value is set.

Note that in this embodiment, the settings are in two stages, but the setting is not limited to this, and it is possible to provide settings in up to six stages depending on the situation. Further, when the probability state regarding the special symbol lottery changes, different setting differences may be provided between the low probability state and the high probability state. Regarding settings, if permitted by the rules, items other than jackpot probability (for example, transition rate to high probability state, transition rate to time reduction state, probability variation number, time reduction number, special variation number, etc.) can be set. A difference may be provided.

Next, control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be explained.

[Reset start (main) processing]
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control CPU 72 starts a reset start process. The reset start process prepares the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 by restoring the gaming state (so-called power restoration) based on the backup information saved at the time of the previous power cut, or conversely clearing the backup information. This is a process for Further, the reset start process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for ensuring stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjusting the initial state.

10 and 11 are flowcharts illustrating a procedure example of reset start processing. Hereinafter, the processing performed by the main control CPU 72 will be explained step by step.

Step S101: The main control CPU 72 first sets the top address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

Step S102: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets the vector type interrupt mode (mode 2) and modifies the default RST type interrupt mode (mode 0). Thereby, the main control CPU 72 can thereafter refer to any address (with the least significant bit being 0) as an interrupt vector and execute the designated interrupt handler.

Step S103: The main control CPU 72 executes reset standby processing here. This process is to ensure a certain amount of standby time (for example, about several thousand ms) at the time of reset start (for example, power-on), and to check the main power-off detection signal during that time. Specifically, after setting a loop counter for the waiting time, the main control CPU 72 bit-checks the input port of the main power-off detection signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The main power-off detection signal is input from, for example, a power monitoring IC that is a peripheral device. If the input of the main power-off detection signal is confirmed before the loop counter reaches 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the process from the beginning. This makes it possible to protect the system, for example, when the main power switch (not shown) is repeatedly turned on and off within a short period of time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

Step S104: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value of the work area is reset (00H). As a result, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted from now on.

Step S105: The main control CPU 72 also initializes a mask register to set an interrupt mask. Specifically, a value that enables CTC interrupts is stored in a mask register.

Step S106: The main control CPU 72 refers to the previously saved input signal from the RAM clear switch and confirms whether the RAM clear switch has been operated (switch ON). If the RAM clear switch is not operated (No), then step S107 is executed.

Step S107: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether the backup validity determination flag is set. If the backup was successfully completed in the previous power-off process and the backup validity determination flag (for example, "A55AH") is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S108.

Step S108: The main control CPU 72 performs a sum check on the backup information in the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 performs a sum check on all areas in the work area of the RAM 76 (user work area including a prohibited area and a stack area) except for the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer. If the result of the sum check is normal (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S109.

Step S109: The main control CPU 72 resets the backup validity determination flag (for example, to "0000H").
Step S110: The main control CPU 72 also clears the command that was waiting to be sent immediately before the previous power-off occurred.

Step S111: Next, the main control CPU72 executes production control return processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends return commands to the performance control device 124 (for example, model designation command, special symbol probability state designation command, performance command when the number of working memories increases, performance command when the number of working memories decreases, number cut (remaining counter number command, special gaming state designation command, etc.). In response to this, the production control device 124 changes the production state that was being executed at the time of the previous power cut (for example, internal probability state, display mode of production symbols, production display mode of the number of working memories, sound output content, light emitting state, etc.) can be restored.

Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes state recovery processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets various values in the work area of the RAM 76 based on the backup information, and sets various values to the gaming state that was being executed at the time of the previous power cut (for example, the display mode of special symbols, internal probability state, (working memory contents, various flag states, random number update state, etc.). The main control CPU 72 also restores the backed up PC register values.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch was operated when the power was turned on (step S106: Yes), the backup validity determination flag was not set (step S107: No), or the backup information was not normal. (Step S108: No), the main control CPU 72 moves to step S113.

Step S113: The main control CPU 72 clears the storage contents of the RAM 76 other than the prohibited area. As a result, the work area and stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is stored, its contents are erased.
Step S114: The main control CPU 72 also initializes the RAM 76.

Step S115: The main control CPU72 executes production control output processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs a command (command necessary for production control) to be transmitted to the production control device 124 after initial setting.

Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes payout control output processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an instruction command to the payout control device 92 to start paying out prize balls.

Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes CTC initial setting processing and initializes the CTC (counter/timer circuit), which is a peripheral device. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an interrupt vector register and also sets an interrupt count value (for example, 4 ms) in the CTC. As a result, the next time a CTC interrupt occurs, the main control CPU 72 can continue processing from the backed up program address of the PC register.

When the above procedure is executed in the reset start process, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the main loop shown in FIG. 11 (connection symbol A→A).

Steps S118 and S119: The main control CPU 72 prohibits interrupts and then executes a power-off occurrence check process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 bit-checks the input port of the main power cutoff detection signal and monitors the occurrence of power cutoff (drop in drive voltage). When the power is cut off, the main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffers corresponding to the normal electric accessory solenoid 88 and the big prize opening solenoid 90, and then clears the entire work area of the RAM 76 except for the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer. Back up the contents of and save the sum result value in the sum check buffer. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the above-mentioned valid value (for example, "A55AH") in the backup validity determination flag area, prohibits access to the RAM 76, and stops the process (NOP). On the other hand, if power interruption does not occur, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S120. Note that there is also a known programming example in which the CPU executes processing when such a power-off occurs as non-maskable interrupt (NMI) processing.

Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes initial value update random number update processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) initial values of various software random numbers. In this embodiment, various random numbers (for example, jackpot symbol random numbers, reach determination random numbers, fluctuation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) other than the jackpot determination random number (hardware random number) and the hit determination random number (hardware random number) corresponding to normal symbols are used. is generated programmatically. These software random numbers are updated by a loop counter within a predetermined range in another interrupt process (step S201 in FIG. 13). (the random number may not be the target) is changed. The random number for updating the initial value is used to randomly change this initial value, and in step S120, the random number for updating the initial value is updated. Note that step S120 is executed after interrupts are prohibited in step S118 because a similar process is executed in another interrupt management process (step S202 in FIG. ). As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the jackpot determination random number and the hit determination random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number generator 75, and the update cycle thereof is faster than the timer interrupt cycle (for example, several ms). (for example, several μs), there is no need to update the initial values of the jackpot determining random number and the winning determining random number.

Steps S121 and S122: The main control CPU 72 allows interrupts and executes other random number update processing. The random numbers updated in this process are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to determination of winning type (hit type) among software random numbers. This process is performed in the remaining time when a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes another interrupt management process (FIG. 13). Note that the details of the interrupt management process will be described later.

[Power outage check process]
FIG. 12 is a flowchart specifically showing a procedure example of the above-mentioned power-off occurrence check process.
Step S130: First, the main control CPU 72 sets conditions for checking for occurrence of power outage. This check condition can be set, for example, as an on-counter value for confirming that the main power-off detection signal is continuously output.

Step S132: Next, the main control CPU 72 reads the main power-off detection switch input port and checks whether a main power-off detection signal is output (checks a specific bit). Although not particularly shown, a main power-off detection switch is mounted on the main controller 70, for example, and this main power-off detection switch monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power supply control unit 162 and determines the voltage level. Outputs a main power failure detection signal when the voltage falls below the reference voltage. Note that the main power-off detection switch may be built into the power supply control unit 162. When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the main power-off detection signal is not being output at this point in time (No), the main control CPU 72 exits from this process and returns to the reset start process. On the other hand, if it is confirmed that the main power cutoff detection signal is output (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S134.

Step S134: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the above check conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the on-counter value set in step S130 is subtracted by 1, for example, and it is checked whether the result becomes 0 or not. If the on-counter value is not 0 at this point in time (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to step S132 and reconfirms the main power-off detection switch input port. Then, when the check condition is satisfied by repeating the loop from step S134 to step S132 (step S134: Yes), the main control CPU 72 next proceeds to step S136.

Step S136: The main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the test signal terminal and command control signal in addition to the output port corresponding to the normal electric accessory solenoid 88 and the big winning opening solenoid 90 as described above.

Step S138, Step S140: Next, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents of the work area of the RAM 76, excluding the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer, in units of bytes, and repeats the addition until the addition is completed for the entire area. .
Step S142: When the sum calculation is completed for all areas (step S140: Yes), the main control CPU 72 stores the sum result value in the sum check buffer.

Step S144: Next, the main control CPU 72 stores the valid value in the backup validity determination flag area as described above.
Step S146: Further, the main control CPU 72 stores "01H" indicating access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the prohibited area and the stack area) of the RAM 76.
Step S148: The main control CPU 72 then enters a standby loop and stops all other processes in preparation for the main power cutoff. After the main power is turned off, backup power is supplied from a backup power circuit (not shown) (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted in the main controller 70), so the memory contents of the RAM 76 are lost even after the main power is turned off. It is retained without doing anything. Note that the backup power supply circuit may be built into the power supply control unit 162, for example.

Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76 to be backed up (to be summed) is retained as memory in the RAM 76 even after the main power is turned off. Further, the retained memory is restored as backup information when the power is turned off, after confirming that the checksum is normal in the previous reset start process (FIG. 10).

[Interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing)]
Next, interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing) will be explained. FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for interrupt management processing. The main control CPU 72 executes interrupt management processing at predetermined time intervals (for example, several milliseconds) based on an interrupt request signal from the counter/timer circuit. Each step will be explained below.

Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the registers (accumulator A, flag register F, and each pair of general-purpose registers B to L) used during the execution of the main loop to the save area of the RAM 76. After the values are saved, other values can be written to the registers (A to L) during interrupt management processing.

Step S201: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a lottery random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of a counter for generating various random numbers for lottery. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76, and the value is looped within a specified range. The various random numbers include, for example, jackpot symbol random numbers.

Step S202: The main control CPU 72 executes the initial value update random number update process here as well. The contents of the processing are the same as those described above.

Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes input processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 inputs various switch signals from the input/output (I/O) port 79. Specifically, the passage detection signal from the gate switch 78, the middle starting winning opening switch 80, the right starting winning opening switch 82, the first count switch 84, the second counting switch 85, the winning opening switch 86, and the specific area switch 83. Reads the input state (ON/OFF) of the winning detection signal from.

Step S204: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous input process, the gate switch 78, middle start winning port switch 80, right starting winning port switch 82, first count switch 84, second count switch 85, specific area switch 83 Events that occur during the game are determined based on the passage detection signal from the player, and further processing is executed depending on each event that occurs. Note that the specific details of the switch input event processing will be described later using another flowchart.

In this embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the middle start winning port switch 80 or the right start winning port switch 82, the main control CPU 72 performs an internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, respectively. It is determined that an event that triggers (lottery trigger) has occurred. Further, when a passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event that triggers a lottery corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred. When determining that any of the events has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes processing corresponding to each event. In addition, the process executed when the winning detection signal is input from the middle starting winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82 will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S205, Step S206: The main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol game process and the normal symbol game process during the interrupt management process. These processes are for concretely advancing the game in the pachinko machine 1. Among these, in the special symbol game processing (step S205), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and controls the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol. 2. It controls the variable display and stop display by the special symbol display device 35, and controls the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 according to the display results. In addition, in the normal symbol game processing (step S206), the main control CPU 72 controls the variable display and stop display by the above-mentioned normal symbol display device 33, and operates the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. control. In addition, the details of the special symbol game process and the normal symbol game process will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S207: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a prize ball payout process. In this process, a prize ball instruction is given to the payout control device 92 to instruct the number of prize balls based on winning detection signals input from various switches 80, 82, 84, 85, and 86 in the previous input process (step S203). Output the command.

[About the number of prize balls and the number of game balls acquired]
The number of prize balls in the starting hole of the first special symbol and the number of prize balls in the starting hole of the second special symbol are each set to a prescribed number of one or more. Further, the number of prize balls may be made different between the starting hole of the first special symbol and the starting hole of the second special symbol. Furthermore, the minimum number of prize balls is set based on the winning probability of the special symbol and the expected value of the total number of game balls acquired (the average number of balls that will be rolled out during the series of periods from the first hit until the end of the time reduction state). You may. Furthermore, the winning probability of the special symbol, the expected value of the total number of game balls won, the number of openings of the grand prize opening, the opening time of the grand prize opening, the maximum number of prizes of the grand prize opening, and the number of prize balls of the grand prize opening are predetermined. If the conditions are met, a jackpot may be set in which the number of game balls acquired in one jackpot is less than 1/4 of the maximum number of game balls acquired.

Step S208: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends the above-mentioned external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation number information, jackpot information, starting opening information, etc.) to the hall computer of the gaming hall through the external terminal board 160. Store in port output request buffer.

In addition, in this embodiment, among various external information signals, for example, "Jackpot 1" to "Jackpot 5" are outputted as jackpot information to the outside, so that an external electronic device (data display (external information signal output means) can provide a variety of jackpot information to players (external information signal output means). In other words, by dividing and outputting jackpot information into multiple jackpots 1 to 5, jackpot types (winning types) can be aggregated and managed from these combinations on a hall computer (not shown), and internally Recognizing changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or shortening state of symbol fluctuation time, or occurrence of a small hit (a hit where the conditional device does not operate) that is not classified as a "jackpot" even if it is other than non-winning. It becomes possible to aggregate and manage information. In addition, based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpots that have occurred within the past few business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each machine is currently hitting a jackpot. Or, it is possible to recognize whether or not the symbol fluctuation time is currently being shortened for each machine. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls in detail the output status (ON or OFF set) of each of "Jackpot 1" to "Jackpot 5".

Step S209: The main control CPU 72 also executes test signal processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates various test signals representing its own internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, jackpot, probability variation function in operation, time reduction function in operation). and stores them in the port output request buffer. Using this test signal, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested, for example, outside the main control device 70.

Step S210: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes display output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 controls the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol memory lamp 33a. Controls the lighting state of the operation memory lamp 35a, the game state display device 38, etc. Specifically, the drive signal stored in the port output request buffer in the previous special symbol game process (step S205) or normal symbol game process (step S206) is outputted to the port. Note that the drive signal is stored in the port output request buffer as byte data to be applied to each LED. As a result, each LED is driven in a predetermined display mode (a mode that displays changing symbols, a stop display, a number of active memories, a game status display, etc.).

Step S211: The main control CPU 72 also executes output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the external information signal (byte data) stored in the port output request buffer in the previous external information process (step S208). In addition, the main control CPU 72 receives drive signals and test signals for the normal electric accessory solenoid 88, the first big prize opening solenoid 90, the second big winning opening solenoid 97, and the specific area solenoid 99, which are stored in the port output request buffer. etc. and output to the port.

Step S212: The main control CPU72 executes production control output processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 checks whether there is a command (command necessary for production control) that should be sent to the production control device 124 in the command buffer, and if there is an unsent command, the command to be output is sent. Port output.

Step S213: Then, the main control CPU 72 clears the port output request buffer stored in the current CTC interrupt.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is given in which the processing of steps S205 to S212 (gaming control program module) is executed as a timer interrupt processing, but these processing is incorporated into the main loop of the CPU and executed. There are also known programming examples.

Step S214: When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 stores a value (01H) specifying the end of the interrupt in the interrupt program counter, and ends the CTC interrupt.

Steps S215 and S216: Then, the main control CPU 72 restores the saved values of the registers (A to L) and permits the next CTC interrupt. After this, the main control CPU 72 returns to the main loop (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

[Switch input event processing]
FIG. 14 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of switch input event processing (step S204 in FIG. 13). Each step will be explained below.

Step S10: The main control CPU 72 checks whether a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery opportunity has occurred) from the medium start winning opening switch 80 corresponding to the first special symbol. If the input of this winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S12 and executes the first special symbol memory update process. The specific contents of the process will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if the winning detection signal is not input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

Step S14: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery opportunity has occurred) from the right starting winning opening switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. If the input of this winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 and executes the second special symbol memory update process. Similarly, the specific contents of the process will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if the winning detection signal is not input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S18.

Step S18: The main control CPU 72 checks whether a winning detection signal has been input from the first count switch 84 corresponding to the first big winning opening 30b of the first variable winning device 30. If the input of this winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S19 and executes the first big winning opening counting process. In the first big winning hole counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the first variable winning device 30 for each round during the jackpot game. On the other hand, if the winning detection signal is not input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S20.

Step S20: The main control CPU 72 checks whether a winning detection signal has been input from the second count switch 85 corresponding to the second big winning opening 31b of the second variable winning device 31. If the input of this winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S21 and executes the second big winning opening counting process. In the second big winning hole counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the second variable winning device 31 during the jackpot game (during the small win game). On the other hand, if the winning detection signal is not input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S22.

Step S22: The main control CPU 72 checks whether a passage detection signal has been input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol. If the input of this passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S24 and executes a normal symbol memory update process. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU 72 checks whether the current number of normal symbols in working memory is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4), and if the upper limit number has not been reached, acquires a random number per normal symbol. do. Further, the main control CPU 72 increments the number of normal symbol working memories by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the obtained random number value per normal symbol in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. On the other hand, if the passage detection signal is not input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S26.

Step S26: The main control CPU 72 checks whether a passage detection signal has been input from the specific area switch 83 corresponding to the specific area 31x in the second big prize opening 31b. If the input of this passing detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S28 and executes a process of turning on the specific area preliminary flag. On the other hand, if the passage detection signal is not input (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 13).

[First special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol storage update process (step S12 in FIG. 14). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol storage update process will be explained step by step.

Step S30: First, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the first special symbol working memory number counter and confirms whether the working memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (number of sets) of jackpot determination random numbers, jackpot symbol random numbers, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Here, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into eight sections (for example, 2 bytes each) used in common for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and each section contains the jackpot determining random number and the jackpot symbol. Random numbers can be stored in sets (sets). At this time, if the value of the working memory number counter corresponding to the first special symbol has reached the maximum value (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 14). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

Step S31: The main control CPU 72 adds one to the first special symbol operation memory number. The first special symbol working storage number counter is stored, for example, in the working storage number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) its value. Based on the value of the counter added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a will be controlled in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 13).

Step S32: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (obtaining the first lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The random number value is obtained by specifying the pin address of the random number generator 75. When the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, address designation is performed twice, one byte each for the upper and lower parts. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number from the specified address, it saves this at the transfer destination address as the jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol.

Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. This random number value is also acquired by specifying the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number from the designated address, it saves this as the jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S34: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a fluctuation pattern determination random number from the fluctuation random number counter area of the RAM 76 as random values regarding the fluctuation conditions of the first special symbol (fluctuation pattern determination element acquisition means). Acquisition of these random numbers is similarly performed by specifying the address of the variable random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 obtains the reach determination random number and the fluctuation pattern determination random number from the specified address, the main control CPU 72 saves these at the transfer destination address.

Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and fluctuation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, and transfers these random numbers to an empty section in the area. (first lottery element storage means, storage means). The plurality of sections are set in order (for example, first to fourth), and if all the first to fourth sections are empty at this stage, each random number is stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fourth sections are empty, each random number is stored in order from the second section. Note that the random number storage area is read in a FIFO (First In First Out) format.

Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether the current special game management status (game status) is a jackpot. If it is not a jackpot (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S37 and S38. If it is a jackpot (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. The reason why this judgment is made in the present embodiment is that no performance based on pre-reading is performed for a ball entering during a jackpot.

Step S37: If the jackpot is not in progress (step S36: No), the main control CPU 72 executes the performance determination process at the time of acquisition regarding the first special symbol. This process is based on the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot symbol random number, and the fluctuation pattern determination random number of the first special symbol obtained in the previous steps S32 to S34, and the special symbol lottery result and fluctuation time are calculated in advance (before the fluctuation starts). This is to determine the contents of the performance (so-called "pre-reading"). In this process, the result of the preliminary determination of the first special symbol is set in the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination performance command.

Step S38: After executing the performance determination process at the time of acquisition, the main control CPU 72 then sets the upper byte (for example, "B8H") of the special symbol destination determination performance command regarding the first special symbol. This upper byte data describes that the command type is "for special symbol destination determination performance regarding the first special symbol." Note that the lower byte (information regarding validity and information regarding fluctuation time) of the special figure destination determination performance command is set in the previous acquisition performance determination process (step S37), so here, the upper byte is combined with the lower byte. By doing this, a command with a length of, for example, one word is generated.

Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command when the number of working memories increases regarding the first special symbol. Specifically, a 1-word long value is obtained by adding the increased number of working memories (for example, "01H" to "04H") to the lower byte of the preceding value of the upper byte that indicates the type of command (for example, "BBH"). Generate production commands. At this time, the second digit of the lower byte is set to "0" by default, thereby indicating that the value is "a result (change information) of an increase in the number of working memories." In other words, if the lower byte is "01H", this means that the current number of working memories is "01H" as a result of increasing by one from the previous number of working memories "00H". Similarly, if the lower byte is "02H" to "04H", it means that the previous working memory number was increased by one from "01H" to "03H", and the current working memory number is "02H" to "03H". 04H". Note that the preceding value "BBH" is a value indicating that the current production command is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S39: Then, the main control CPU72 executes the production command output setting process regarding the first special symbol. In this process, the special symbol destination determination production command generated in the previous step S38, the performance command when the number of working memory increases generated in step S38a, and the starting opening prize sound control command are transmitted to the production control device 124 ( storage number notification means).

When the above procedure is completed or the first special symbol operation memory number has reached 4 (step S30: No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 14).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol storage update process (step S16 in FIG. 14). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol storage update process will be explained in order.

Step S40: The main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter and confirms whether the working memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol working storage number counter represents the number (number of sets) of jackpot determination random numbers, jackpot symbol random numbers, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter has reached the maximum value (for example, 3) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 14). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol operation storage number counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S41 and thereafter.

Step S41: The main control CPU 72 adds one to the second special symbol working memory number (increments the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter). Similar to the previous step S31 (FIG. 15), the lighting state of the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is controlled in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 13) based on the value of the counter added here. That will happen.

Step S42: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of second lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The method of acquiring the random value is the same as that in step S32 (FIG. 15) described above.

Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The method of acquiring the random number value is the same as step S33 (FIG. 15) described above.

Step S44: Also, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires the reach determination random number and the fluctuation pattern determination random number regarding the fluctuation condition of the second special symbol from the fluctuation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (fluctuation pattern determining element acquisition means). Acquisition of these random values is also performed in the same manner as step S34 (FIG. 15) described above.

Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and fluctuation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, and transfers these random numbers to an empty section in the area. (second lottery element storage means, storage means). The storage method is the same as step S35 (FIG. 15) described above.

Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether the current gaming management status (gaming status) is a jackpot. If it is not a jackpot (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. On the other hand, if it is a jackpot (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this judgment is made in the present embodiment is because similarly, no effect based on pre-reading is performed for a ball that occurs during a jackpot.

Step S46: If the jackpot is not in progress (step S45a: No), then the main control CPU 72 executes the performance determination process at the time of acquisition regarding the second special symbol. In this process, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance (before the fluctuation starts) based on the jackpot determination random number and jackpot symbol random number of the second special symbol obtained in the previous steps S42 to S44, respectively, and the performance content is determined based on the result. It is for judgment. In this process, the result of the preliminary determination of the second special symbol is set in the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination performance command.

Step S47: After executing the performance determination process at the time of acquisition, the main control CPU 72 then sets the upper byte (for example, "B9H") of the special symbol destination determination performance command. This upper byte data describes that the command type is "for special symbol destination determination performance related to the second special symbol". Similarly here, the lower byte of the special figure destination judgment effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect judgment process (step S46), so here, for example, by combining the upper byte with the lower byte, the length of 1 word is set. command will be generated.

Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a production command when the number of working memories increases regarding the second special symbol. Here, a 1-word long production command is created by adding the increased number of working memories (for example, "01H" to "04H") to the lower byte of the preceding value (for example, "BCH") of the upper byte that indicates the type of command. generate. Similarly, for the second special symbol, by setting the second digit of the lower byte to "0" by default, it is possible to indicate that the value is "a result of an increase in the number of working memories (change information)". can. The preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the current performance command is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S49: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the production command output setting process regarding the second special symbol. As a result, a special symbol destination determination performance command, a performance command when the number of active memories increases, a starting opening prize winning sound control command, etc. regarding the second special symbol are transmitted to the performance control device 124 (memory number notification means). Furthermore, upon completion of the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to switch input event processing (FIG. 14).

In addition, in this embodiment, in consideration of the performance executed within the variable time of the second special symbol in the time shortened state, the maximum value of the number of second special symbols activated and stored is set to three, but the number of activated memories The maximum value of is not limited to this, and may be four. Further, the specific content of the performance executed within the variable time of the second special symbol in the time shortened state will be described in detail later with reference to another drawing.

[Processing for determining performance upon acquisition]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the performance determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU 72 executes the performance determination process at the time of acquisition in the first special symbol memory update process and the second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 15, step S46 in FIG. means). As described above, this process is executed for each of the first special symbol (when the ball enters the medium start winning hole 26) and the second special symbol (when the ball enters the variable start winning device 28). Therefore, the following explanation may apply to the process related to the first special symbol, and may apply to the process related to the second special symbol. The details of the process will be explained below along with each step.

Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower byte (for example, "00H") of the special figure destination determination performance command (destination determination information). Note that the byte data set here represents the standard value of the command (when it fails).

Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads a jackpot determination random number as a random number for first determination. The random numbers loaded here are those stored in the RAM 76 in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 15) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 16). .

Step S54: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the loaded random number is outside the winning value range (here, below the lower limit) (lottery result destination determination means, preliminary determination means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value (lower limit value) in the A register, and subtracts the loaded random value from this comparison value. Note that the comparison value (lower limit value) is predefined according to the jackpot probability of the special symbol lottery in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the main control CPU 72 determines, for example, from the value of the flag register whether the calculation result is 0 or a positive value. As a result, if the loaded random number is outside the winning value range (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes off-time variation pattern information preliminary determination processing (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a variation pattern destination determination command regarding the variation time at the time of deviation. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects the prior determination information regarding the fluctuation time (or fluctuation pattern number) especially when the "time reduction function" is activated. For example, if the current state is when the "time reduction function" is activated, the main control CPU 72 determines that the variation time corresponds to the "missing reach variation (non-reduction variation time)" based on the loaded reach determination random number. Determine whether it exists or not. As a result, if the variation time corresponds to "missing reach variation (non-reduced variation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a variation pattern destination determination command corresponding to "non-reduced variation time during time reduction". In addition, in the case of reach variation, the "reach group (type of reach)" may also be determined from the reach mode random number, and a variation pattern destination determination command may be generated from the result. On the other hand, if the variation time does not correspond to the "missing reach variation (non-reduced variation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a variation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction medium reduction variation time". Alternatively, if the current state is when the "time reduction function" is not activated (low probability state), the main control CPU 72 determines whether the variation time corresponds to the "normal reach variation" based on the loaded reach judgment random number. Determine whether or not. As a result, if the variation time corresponds to the "out-of-normal reach variation", the main control CPU 72 generates a variation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "out-of-normal reach variation time". On the other hand, if the variation time does not correspond to the "out-of-normal reach variation", the main control CPU 72 generates a variation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "out-of-normal variation time". Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the production command output setting process (steps S39, S49). In addition, in this process, the main control CPU 72 may generate a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation pattern at the time of a small hit, similar to the process for the above-mentioned miss.

When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 ends the performance determination process at the time of acquisition and returns to the calling source first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 15) or second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 16). On the other hand, in the judgment at step S54, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of winning values but within the range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 next proceeds to step S74.

Step S74: The main control CPU72 executes jackpot symbol type determination processing. This process is for determining the jackpot type (winning type) at that time based on the jackpot symbol random number paired with the jackpot determination random number. For example, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot symbol random number for each symbol stored in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 15) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 16). Then, similar to step S54, calculation using the comparison value is executed, and from the result it is determined which winning symbol corresponds. The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S78.

Step S78: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination performance command. For example, the special symbol destination judgment value is set to "00H" if it corresponds to a "symbol that does not transition to a time-reduced state" (predetermined conditions for winning are not met), and corresponds to a "symbol that transitions to a time-reduced state". If so (predetermined conditions regarding winning are met), "01H" is set (gaming state setting means). In any case, by setting the lower byte data here, the standard lower byte data "00H" set in the previous step S50 will be rewritten.

Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot fluctuation pattern information preliminary determination process (fluctuation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern destination determination command regarding the fluctuation time at the time of jackpot. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects, for example, prior determination information regarding the reach fluctuation time (or fluctuation pattern number) at the time of a jackpot. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the production command output setting process (steps S39, S49).

After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 15) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 16).

[Special pattern game processing]
Next, details of the special symbol game process executed in the interrupt management process (FIG. 13) will be explained. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the configuration of the special symbol game process. The special symbol game processing includes execution selection processing (step S1000), special symbol variation pre-processing (step S2000), special symbol variation processing (step S3000), special symbol stop display processing (step S4000), and variable winning device management processing. The configuration includes a subroutine (program module) group of (step S5000). Here, first, the basic flow of the special symbol game process will be explained along with each process.

Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of steps S2000 to S5000) from the "jump table". For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and also sets the end of the special symbol game process in the stack pointer as the return destination address.

Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far (special symbol game management status). For example, if the special symbol has not yet started variable display (special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation pre-processing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed (special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation processing (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and selects the special symbol variation processing (step S3000). If the process has been completed (special symbol game management status: 02H), the special symbol stop display process (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In addition, in this embodiment, a process is selected by specifying a jump destination address in a "jump table", but apart from such a selection method, a "process flag" or a "process selection flag" etc. are used to select a process. There are also known programming examples where the CPU selects the next process to execute. In such a programming example, the CPU calls each process, and in the first step, refers to each flag and performs a conditional branch (continuation/return). However, in the selection method of this embodiment, the main control There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

Step S2000: In the special symbol variation preprocessing, the main control CPU 72 performs work to prepare conditions for starting variable display of the special symbol. Note that the specific contents of the process will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S3000: In the special symbol fluctuation process, the main control CPU 72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the fluctuation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is output for each segment and dot (numbers 0 to 7) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, and thereby the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

Step S4000: In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Similarly, an ON or OFF drive signal is outputted to each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED, but the pattern of the drive signal is constant, and thereby the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state.

Step S5000: The variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot or small win mode (other than non-winning mode) in the previous special symbol stop display process. Note that a jackpot game or a small win game is started depending on the manner in which the special symbols are stopped and displayed.

[Jackpot game]
For example, when the special symbols are stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode for 15 rounds, a jackpot game (a special game advantageous to the player) is executed. During the jackpot game, the jump destination is set to the variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of special symbols is not performed. In the variable winning device management process, the first grand prize opening solenoid 90 is energized for a certain period of time (for example, 29 seconds or until 10 winnings are counted) for a preset number of consecutive operations (for example, 15 times). Accordingly, the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern (continuous operation of the special electric accessory). During this time, by intensively winning game balls with the first variable winning device 30, the player is given an opportunity to win many prize balls at once (special game execution means). The opening and closing operations of the first variable prize winning device 30 at the time of a jackpot are referred to as a "round", and if the number of continuous operations is 15 times in total, these may be collectively referred to as a "15 rounds". In this embodiment, a plurality of winning types (winning symbols) are provided for the 15-round jackpot. In addition, the types of jackpots are not limited to the 15-round jackpot, but may include multiple types of 4-round jackpots, 2-round jackpots, and the like.

In addition, when the main control CPU 72 sets the big winning hole opening pattern (the number of rounds, the number of opening/closing operations per round, the opening time, etc.) in the variable winning device management process, the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes for one round. Each time the operation is completed, the value of the round number counter is incremented by 1. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with an initial value of 0. The main control CPU 72 also generates a round number command representing the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the production control device 124 in production control output processing (step S212 in FIG. 13). When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of consecutive operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the jackpot game (big win) for that round.

Then, when the jackpot game ends, the main control CPU 72 changes the state after the jackpot game ends (time reduction state, special game state) based on the game state flag (time reduction function activation flag) (time reduction state transition means, (game status setting means). In the "time reduction state", the time reduction function is activated, and the lottery probability of the normal symbol activation lottery is set from normal probability (low probability) to high probability, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened and variable start winning prize is set. The opening time of the device 28 is extended and the number of openings is increased (so-called electric chew support is performed).

[Small win]
Further, in this embodiment, a small win is provided as a winning type other than non-winning. When a small win is won, a small win game is performed separately from the jackpot game, and the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes (special game execution means). For example, when the special symbols are stopped and displayed in a small win mode, a small win game (a special game advantageous to the player) is executed. During the small winning game, the jump destination is set to the variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the special symbols are not displayed in a variable manner. In the variable winning device management process, the second grand prize opening solenoid 97 operates for a certain period of time (for example, 1.8 seconds or until 10 winnings are counted) for a preset number of times (for example, once or multiple times). It is excited, and as a result, the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern (operation of special electric accessory). During this time, by intensively winning game balls with the second variable winning device 31, the player is given an opportunity to win a certain amount of prize balls (special game execution means).

In addition, in the variable winning device management process during a small winning game, the specific area solenoid 99 is energized for a certain period of time (for example, 1.6 seconds) and for a preset number of operations (for example, once), so that the specific area solenoid 99 The slide member 31c opens and closes in a predetermined pattern. By allowing the game ball to pass through the specific area 31x during this time, the player is given an opportunity to start a jackpot game. That is, whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small winning game determines whether or not to start the jackpot game in the variable winning device management process. In this embodiment, a plurality of winning types (winning symbols) are provided for small winnings, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x, a jackpot game corresponding to the winning type is started.

In addition, even if the small winning game ends without the game ball passing through the specific area 31x, the "time reduction function" will not operate, so the benefit of shifting to the "time reduction state" will not be granted (therefore, (This is not a prerequisite for this.) (Except when the upper limit has been reached.)

[Multiple winning types]
In this embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned "15 round jackpot", "16 round jackpot" is provided as a plurality of winning types. "15 Round Jackpot" starts when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode, while "16 Round Jackpot" starts when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small win mode, and the game ball is played during the small win game. It is started when passing through the specific area 31x. In addition, the operation of the second variable winning device 31 corresponds to the first round of the 16 round jackpot, and the operation of the first variable winning device 30 corresponds to the remaining 15 rounds. However, in this embodiment, jackpots other than 16 rounds and 15 rounds may be provided.

The above-mentioned winning type corresponds to the type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed at the time of winning. For example, "15th round jackpot" corresponds to jackpots of "1st winning symbol", "2nd winning symbol" and "5th winning symbol", and "16th round jackpot" corresponds to "3rd winning symbol", "4th winning symbol" This corresponds to the small hit of the “winning symbol” and the “sixth winning symbol” (the jackpot when passing the specific area 31x). Therefore, hereinafter, the "winning type" will be appropriately referred to as the "winning symbol."

[1st winning symbol]
In the special symbol stop display process, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of "first winning symbol", a jackpot game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first big prize opening 30b is opened once at a time over a sufficiently long period of time (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds) from the first round, and this continues until the fifth round. From the 6th round to the 15th round (final round), the first grand prize opening 30b is opened once for a short time (for example, the maximum opening time is 0.5 seconds). Therefore, the jackpot game using the "first winning symbol" is a jackpot game in which balls (prize balls) for five rounds can be awarded to the player. In addition, if a specified number of wins (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) occur in one round, the first big prize opening 30b will be closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse (the same applies hereinafter). . After the jackpot game ends, the game shifts to the "non-time saving state" (or is set to the "non-time saving state". The same applies hereafter).

[Second winning symbol]
In the special symbol stop display process, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a "second winning symbol", a jackpot game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first big prize opening 30b is opened once at a time over a sufficiently long period of time (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds) from the first round, and this continues until the fifth round. From the 6th round to the 15th round (final round), the first grand prize opening 30b is opened once for a short time (for example, the maximum opening time is 0.5 seconds). Therefore, the jackpot game using the "second winning symbol" is a jackpot game in which balls (prize balls) for five rounds can be awarded to the player. Then, by activating the "time saving function" after the jackpot game ends, the game shifts to the "time saving state".

[3rd winning symbol]
In the special symbol stop display process, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of "third winning symbol", a small winning game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small winning game, The small winning gaming state shifts to the jackpot gaming state. In this case, starting from the second round, the first big prize opening 30b is opened once at a time over a sufficiently long period of time (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds), and this continues until the sixth round. From the 7th round to the 16th round (final round), the first grand prize opening 30b is opened once for a short time (for example, the maximum opening time is 0.5 seconds). Therefore, in the jackpot game when the "third winning symbol" is applied, it is possible to award the player with balls (prize balls) for five rounds. After the jackpot game ends, the state shifts to a "non-time saving state".

[4th winning symbol]
In the special symbol stop display process, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of "fourth winning symbol", a small winning game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small winning game, The small winning gaming state shifts to the jackpot gaming state. In this case, from the second round, the first big prize opening 30b is opened once at a time over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest), and this continues until the 11th round. From the 12th round to the 16th round (final round), the first grand prize opening 30b is opened once for a short time (for example, the maximum opening time is 0.5 seconds). Therefore, in the jackpot game when the "fourth winning symbol" is applied, balls (prize balls) for 10 rounds can be awarded to the player. Then, by activating the "time saving function" after the jackpot game ends, the game shifts to the "time saving state".

[5th winning symbol]
In the special symbol stop display process, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of "fifth winning symbol", a jackpot game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first big prize opening 30b is opened once at a time over a sufficiently long time (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds) from the first round, and this continues until the 15th round. Therefore, the jackpot game using the "third winning symbol" is a jackpot game in which balls (prize balls) for 15 rounds can be awarded to the player. After the jackpot game ends, the state shifts to a "non-time saving state".

[6th winning symbol]
In the special symbol stop display process, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of "sixth winning symbol", a small winning game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small winning game, The small winning gaming state shifts to the jackpot gaming state. In this case, starting from the second round, the first big prize opening 30b is opened once at a time over a sufficiently long period of time (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds), and this continues until the 16th round. Therefore, in the jackpot game when the "sixth winning symbol" is applied, balls (prize balls) for 15 rounds can be awarded to the player. After the jackpot game ends, the state shifts to a "non-time saving state".

In this way, if the jackpot game starts with the "second winning symbol", or if the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small win game with the "fourth winning symbol", the jackpot game is started. If the game starts, the game shifts to the "time reduction state" after the jackpot game ends.

On the other hand, if the jackpot game is started with either the "1st winning symbol" or the "5th winning symbol", or the "3rd winning symbol" or the "6th winning symbol" If the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small winning game and the jackpot game is started under the above conditions, the game shifts to a ``non-time reduction state'' after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, if you win a small hit in the internal lottery and pass a specific area during the small win game, the jackpot game will be executed, and after the jackpot game ends, the gaming machine will shift to a time reduction state depending on the type of winning symbol. It is called a so-called 1 type and 2 type mixed type gaming machine.

[Special pattern variation pre-processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of special symbol variation pre-processing. Each step will be explained below.

Step S2100: First, the main control CPU 72 checks whether the first special symbol working memory number or the second special symbol working memory number remains (greater than 0). This confirmation can be performed by referring to the value of the working memory number counter stored in the RAM 76. When the number of working memories of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the demonstration setting process of step S2500.

Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a command for demonstration production. The demonstration production command is output to the production control device 124 in the production control output process (step S212 in FIG. 13). When the demonstration setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. Note that when returning, it returns to the last address as described above (the same applies thereafter).

On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2200.

Step S2200: The main control CPU72 executes special symbol storage area shift processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 preferentially reads out the lottery random numbers (jackpot determination random numbers, jackpot symbol random numbers, etc.) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76 that corresponds to the second special symbol. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections (only the first special symbol is applicable), the main control CPU 72 reads out the random numbers in order from the first section, erases (consumes) them, and then converts the remaining random numbers into 1 Move (shift) to the previous section one by one. The read random numbers are stored, for example, in another temporary storage area. If the random number corresponding to the second special symbol is not stored, the main control CPU 72 reads the random number corresponding to the first special symbol and stores it in a temporary storage area. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for internal lottery in the next jackpot determination process. As a result, in this embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed with priority over the first special symbol. It should be noted that the program may be such that the random numbers are simply read out in the order in which they were stored, without providing such a priority order for each special symbol. In addition, in this process, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the working memory number counter (the first special symbol or the second special symbol, whichever shifted the random number) stored in the RAM 76 by one; Set the latter value as the "number of working memories at the start of fluctuation." As a result, the display mode of the number of memories stored by the first special symbol working memory lamp 34a or the second special symbol working memory lamp 35a changes (decreases by 1) in the above display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 13). . After completing the steps up to this point, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2300.

[Special symbol storage area shift processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the above special symbol storage area shift process. In the previous special symbol variation preprocessing, if the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than "0" (step S2100 in FIG. 19: Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes this special symbol storage area shift process. Each step will be explained below.

Step S2210: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the working memory corresponding to the second special symbol remains. That is, in this embodiment, the working memory corresponding to the second special symbol is consumed with priority over the first special symbol. This confirmation can be performed by referring to the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter stored in the RAM 76. When the value of the working memory number counter corresponding to the second special symbol is 1 or more (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next proceeds to step S2212.

Step S2212: The main control CPU 72 specifies the second special symbol as the special symbol whose storage area is to be shifted. This designation is performed, for example, by setting "02H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2214: On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter corresponding to the second special symbol is 0 (step S2210: No), the main control CPU 72 specifies the first special symbol as the special symbol whose storage area is to be shifted. do. The designation in this case is performed, for example, by setting "01H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2216: The main control CPU 72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM 76 for the target special symbol specified in either step S2212 or step S2214. In addition, the specific contents of the process are as already described in the previous special symbol variation pre-process.

Step S2218: Next, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the working memory counter for the target special symbol. For example, if the object to which the current storage area is to be shifted is the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

Step S2220: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the "number of working memories at the start of variation" from the value of the working memory counter after the subtraction. Incidentally, here, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the value of the working memory counter may be added and then the "number of working memories at the start of variation" may be set.

Step S2222: The main control CPU 72 also checks whether the special symbol to which the current storage area is to be shifted is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: If the target is the second special symbol (Step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets a performance command when the number of working memories decreases regarding the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a one-word long command, but its structure is in contrast to the above-mentioned "effect command when the number of working memories increases." In other words, the command when the number of working memories decreases has a value of the lower byte representing the number of working memories after the decrease (for example, "00H" to "03H") for the preceding value of the upper byte representing the command type (for example, "BCH"). "), and the value of the lower byte is further added (logical summed) with an additional value (for example, "10H") that means "reduction in the number of working memories due to consumption". Therefore, for the lower byte, by ORing the added value "10H", the second digit becomes "1", and this value represents "the result (change information) due to a decrease in the number of working memories". Become something. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is "13H", it means that the previous working memory number "4" (command notation is "14H") has been decreased by one, and the current working memory number is "3" (command notation is "14H"). The notation is "13H"). Similarly, if the lower byte is "12H" to "10H", this is the result of each of the previous working memory numbers "3" to "1" (command notation is "13H" to "11H") reduced by one. , indicates that the current working memory number is "2" to "0" (command notation is "12H" to "10H"). Note that the preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the current performance command is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S2226: If the current target is the first special symbol (Step S2222: No), the main control CPU 72 sets a performance command when the number of working memories decreases regarding the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as above except that the preceding value is a value representing that it is a working memory number command for the first special symbol (for example, "BBH").

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes production command output processing. This process is for transmitting to the production control device 124 the effect command when the number of working memories decreases, which was set in the previous step S2224 or step S2226 (memory number notification means).
After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol variation preprocessing (FIG. 19).

[See Figure 19: Special symbol variation pre-processing]
Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot determination process (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets a range of jackpot values, and determines whether or not the read random value is included within this range (first special symbol lottery execution means, second special symbol lottery execution means). means, lottery execution means). If the random number value read at this time is included in the range of the jackpot value, the main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot flag (01H) and then proceeds to step S2400.

If the above-mentioned jackpot flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 next sets a range of small winning values in the same jackpot determination process, and determines whether or not the read random value is included within this range (first special symbol lottery execution means, second special symbol lottery execution means). The "small hit" here refers to anything other than non-winning (losing), but has a different nature from the "big hit". That is, a "big hit" generates an opportunity (a turning point in the game) to shift to the above-mentioned "time reduction state", but a "small hit" does not generate such an opportunity. A "small win" is positioned as something that satisfies the condition for operating only the second variable winning device 31 (the condition for operating the conditional device is not satisfied). Furthermore, if the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during a "small win", it is positioned as a possibility to develop into a "big win" (the condition for operating the conditional device is satisfied). In any case, if the read random value is within the range of the small winning value, the main control CPU 72 sets the small winning flag and then proceeds to step S2400. In this way, in this embodiment, the range of the jackpot value and the small win value is predefined in the program as the winning range other than non-winning. A jackpot determination may be made by writing each of these into the ROM 74, reading them out, and comparing them with random numbers.

In this embodiment, in the first special symbol lottery, the probability of winning the jackpot is set to 1/224, and the setting is such that the probability of winning the small jackpot is not set. Furthermore, in the second special symbol lottery, the probability of winning the jackpot is set to 1/224, and the probability of winning the small jackpot is set to 1/4. Therefore, in the second special symbol lottery, it is easier to win a small hit than a jackpot. In order to satisfy these jackpot winning probabilities and small winning winning probabilities, the range of jackpot values and the range of small winning values are set by the main control CPU 72 and compared with the read random number values.

Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the value (01H) has been set to the jackpot flag in the previous jackpot determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2402.

Step S2402: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the value (01H) has been set to the small hit flag in the previous jackpot determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the small hit flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2404. In addition, the main control CPU 72 may determine a jackpot (for example, set 01H) or a small hit (set 0AH, for example) based on the value of a common win flag, without separately preparing a jackpot flag and a small win flag.

Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes a stop symbol determination process on miss. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the stop symbol number data when the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 misses. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (when losing) to be sent to the production control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the production control device 124 in production control output processing (step S212 in FIG. 13).

In addition, in this embodiment, since a 7-segment LED is used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of miss is always set to one segment (center The stop symbol number data can be fixed to one value (for example, 64H) by displaying only the bar "-" lit. In this case, the storage capacity used on the program can be reduced, the processing load on the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes off-time variation pattern determination processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines a variation pattern number at the time of a miss for the special symbol (variation pattern selection means). The variation pattern number distinguishes the type (pattern) of the variation display of the special symbol and corresponds to the variation time required for the variation display. The fluctuation patterns include various fluctuation patterns such as normal fluctuations (non-reach fluctuations), reach fluctuations, super reach fluctuations, etc. (the same applies to when there is a big hit or a small hit). Note that information regarding the variation pattern of the selected special symbol is transmitted to the performance control device as a variation pattern command (the same applies to the normal symbol).

Here, since the fluctuating time at the time of a loss differs depending on whether or not it is in the above-mentioned "time reduction state", in this process, the main control CPU 72 loads the gaming state flag and indicates that the current state is "time reduction state". Check whether the status is ``. In addition, even if it is not in the "time reduction state", except when performing a variation that executes a reach effect, the variation time at the time of a miss is the "number of operating memories at the start of variation display (0 to 3)" set in step S2200, for example. (For example, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is 0 → about 12.5 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is 1 → about 8 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is about 12.5 seconds) 2 pieces → about 5 seconds, number of working memory at the start of variable display: 3 pieces → about 2.5 seconds). Note that the stop display time of the symbol at the time of miss is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the variation pattern. Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (when the game is off) in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time when the game goes off on the stop symbol display timer.

The above steps S2404 and S2405 are control procedures when the jackpot determination result is a loss (other than non-winning), but when the determination result is a jackpot (step S2400: Yes) or a small hit (step S2402: Yes) , the main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of jackpot will be explained.

Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot stop symbol determination process (winning type determining means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the current winning symbol (the jackpot stop symbol number) for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the jackpot symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in a special symbol determination data table (winning type defining means). Therefore, the main control CPU 72 can refer to the jackpot stop symbol selection table in the jackpot stop symbol determination process and determine the type of winning symbol based on the jackpot symbol random number from the stored contents.

[Winning symbol at jackpot]
In this embodiment, three types of winning symbols are prepared as winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a jackpot. The breakdown regarding the first winning symbol is the "first winning symbol" or the "second winning symbol", and the breakdown regarding the second winning symbol is only the "fifth winning symbol". Note that each of these winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, if it is a "first winning symbol", the symbols are "first winning symbol A", "first winning symbol B", "first winning symbol C", etc.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have different selection ratios of winning symbols selected at the time of jackpot of the corresponding internal lottery. Therefore, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the winning symbols to be selected depending on whether the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[1st special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of the structure of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol by referring to the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

In the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the distribution value for each winning symbol, and each distribution value "40" and "60" is a percentage when the denominator is 100. Equivalent to. Furthermore, in the second column from the left, "first winning symbols" and "second winning symbols" corresponding to each distribution value are shown. In other words, at the time of a jackpot corresponding to the first special symbol, the percentage that the "first winning symbol" is selected is 40/100 (=40%), and the percentage that the "second winning symbol" is selected is 100%. 60 (=60%). The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using jackpot symbol random numbers.

In any case, if the current jackpot result corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number, and selects the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. The winning symbols are selectively determined. Further, in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning, as shown in the third column from the left. The stop symbol command is written as a combination of MODE value and EVENT value, for example, and the MODE value "B1H" in the upper byte indicates that the current winning symbol was selected when the first special symbol was won. represents. Further, the EVENT values "01H" and "02H" in the lower byte each represent the type of the corresponding winning symbol in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of this jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol and the "first winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning will be written as "B101H". It turns out.

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects a winning symbol from the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, it generates the stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the production control device 124, for example, in the production control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Number of time savings]
In the right column of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the value of the number of time reductions (limit number of times) given after the end of the jackpot game is shown. In the present embodiment, if the symbol corresponds to the "first winning symbol", the number of time reductions is not given. Further, if the symbol corresponds to the "second winning symbol", the number of time reductions is given once (or five times). Note that the number of time saving times is not limited to the above value, and may be two or more times (six times or more).

Here, "1 time (or 5 times)" means that the total number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is one time, or the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is five times. This means that the shortened state ends. For example, if there is no working memory for the second special symbol after the end of a jackpot game, but there is a working memory for the first special symbol, the first special symbol will change first, but the time reduction state will not end as a result, and , even if the first special symbol changes up to four times, the time reduction state does not end. However, if the second special symbol changes once during this time, the time reduction state ends. Further, the time reduction state ends when the first special symbol changes five times without the second special symbol changing even once.

[2nd special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of the structure of the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol by referring to the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

In the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the distribution value for each winning symbol is shown in the left column, and the distribution value "100" corresponds to the ratio when the denominator is 100. Similarly, the second column from the left shows the "fifth winning symbol" corresponding to the distribution value. That is, at the time of the jackpot corresponding to the second special symbol, the rate at which the "fifth winning symbol" is selected is 100/100 (=100%).

If the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol at the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. Determine exactly. Similarly, in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning, as shown in the third column from the left. Here too, the stop symbol command is written as a combination of the above MODE value - EVENT value, and among these, the MODE value "B2H" in the upper byte is the one selected when the current winning symbol was a jackpot of the second special symbol. It represents that. Further, the EVENT value "01H" of the lower byte each represents the type of the corresponding winning symbol in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of this jackpot corresponds to the second special symbol and the "5th winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command will be written as "B201H". .

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects a winning symbol from the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, it generates the stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the production control device 124, for example, in the production control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Number of time savings]
In the right column of the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the value of the number of time reductions (limit number of times) given after the end of the jackpot game is shown. In this embodiment, if the "fifth winning symbol" is matched, the number of time reductions is not given.

[See Figure 19: Special symbol variation pre-processing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the fluctuation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined variable time value in the variable timer, and also sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. Generally, in the case of jackpot reach variation, a longer variation time is determined than in the case of a miss.

Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes jackpot and other setting processing. In this process, if the type of winning symbol (the jackpot stop symbol number) determined in step S2410 is the "second winning symbol", the main control CPU 72 sets the time as the gaming status flag in the flag area of the RAM 76. Set the shortening function activation flag to ON (01H) (time reduction state transition means, time reduction function activation means, game state setting means).

In addition, in the process of step S2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbols (jackpot symbols) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the jackpot symbol number. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of jackpot) as well as the above-mentioned stop symbol command (at the time of jackpot). These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the production control device 124 in the production control output process.

Next, the process when a small hit occurs will be explained.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol at the time of a small hit (the symbol number that stops at the time of a small hit) based on the jackpot symbol random number. Similarly here, the relationship between the jackpot symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol at the time of a small hit is predefined in the small hit stop symbol selection table (winning type specifying means). In this embodiment, in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, the jackpot symbol random number is used to determine the winning symbol at the time of the small hit, but a separate dedicated random number may be used.

[Winning symbol at small hit]
In this embodiment, three types of winning symbols are prepared as winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a small hit. The breakdown regarding the first winning symbol is the "third winning symbol" or the "fourth winning symbol", and the breakdown regarding the second winning symbol is only the "sixth winning symbol". Note that each of these winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, if it is a "third winning symbol", it will be "third winning symbol A", "third winning symbol B", "third winning symbol C", etc.

[1st special symbol stop symbol selection table at small hit]
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of the structure of the stop symbol selection table at the time of the first special symbol small hit. If the result of the current small hit corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol by referring to the first special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means). .

In the symbol selection table that stops at the first special symbol small hit, the left column shows the distribution value for each winning symbol, and each distribution value "75" and "25" is the ratio when the denominator is 100. corresponds to Further, in the second column from the left, "third winning symbol" and "fourth winning symbol" corresponding to each distribution value are shown. In other words, at the time of small winning corresponding to the first special symbol, the percentage of "third winning symbol" selected is 75/100 (=75%), and the percentage of "fourth winning symbol" being selected. is 25/100 (=25%).

As a result of this small hit, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number and selectively determines the winning symbol at the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol small win stop symbol selection table. In the first special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning, as shown in the third column from the left. Here too, the stop symbol command is written as a combination of the above MODE value - EVENT value, and among these, the MODE value "B1H" in the upper byte is the one selected when the current winning symbol was the first special symbol. It represents that. Furthermore, the EVENT values "03H" and "04H" in the lower bytes each represent the type of the corresponding winning symbol in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the "third winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol as a result of the current small hit, the stop symbol command will be written as "B103H".

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects a winning symbol from the first special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, it generates the stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the production control device 124, for example, in the production control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the small hit stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Number of time savings]
In the right column of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the value of the number of time reductions (limit number of times) given after the end of the jackpot game is shown. In this embodiment, if the "third winning symbol" is matched, the number of time reductions is not given. In addition, if it corresponds to the "fourth winning symbol", the number of time reductions is given once (or five times).

[2nd special symbol stop symbol selection table at small hit]
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of the structure of the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table. The main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol by referring to this second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

In the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, the distribution value for each winning symbol is shown in the left column, and the distribution value "100" corresponds to the ratio when the denominator is 100. . Similarly, the second column from the left shows the "sixth winning symbol" corresponding to the distribution value. That is, at the time of the small win corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of "sixth winning symbol" being selected is 100/100 (=100%).

As a result of this small hit, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number and selectively determines the winning symbol at the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol small win stop symbol selection table. In the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning, as shown in the third column from the left. Here too, the stop symbol command is written as a combination of the above MODE value - EVENT value, and among these, the MODE value "B2H" in the upper byte indicates that the current winning symbol was selected when the second special symbol was won. It represents that. Furthermore, the EVENT value "02H" in the lower byte represents the type of the corresponding winning symbol in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the "sixth winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol as a result of the current small hit, the stop symbol command will be written as "B202H".

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects a winning symbol from the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, it generates the stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the production control device 124, for example, in the production control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the small hit stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Number of time savings]
The fourth column (right column) from the left of the second special symbol stop at small hit symbol selection table indicates that the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game and the jackpot game is started, and the jackpot game The value of the number of time reductions given after completion is shown. In this embodiment, if the "sixth winning symbol" is matched, the number of time reductions is not given. In other words, after the end of the jackpot game through the small win with the second special symbol (the game ball passes through the specific area), the time reduction state is not set as the game state.

[See Figure 19: Special symbol variation pre-processing]
Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hit fluctuation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined value of the fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. In this embodiment, the small win is set only in the second special symbol lottery, and when the small win occurs, a variation pattern having a variation time for the small win is selected. Note that a small win may be set in the first special symbol lottery.

Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hit and other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stopped symbols (small winning symbols) by the second special symbol display device 35 based on the small winning stop symbol number. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of a small hit) to be transmitted to the production control device 124. These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the production control device 124 in the production control output process.

Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU72 executes special symbol variation start processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects variation pattern data based on the variation pattern number (miss/hit). At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets a special symbol variation start flag in the flag area of the RAM 76. The main control CPU 72 then generates a fluctuation start command to be sent to the production control device 124. This fluctuation start command is also transmitted to the production control device 124 in the production control output process described above. Further, the variation start command is generated for each symbol, such as a first special symbol variation start command and a second special symbol variation start command. After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol variation processing (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and returns to the special symbol game processing.

[Figure 18: Special symbol fluctuation processing, special symbol stop display processing]
In the special symbol fluctuation processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the fluctuation timer value from the register to the timer counter as described above, and then loads the timer value according to the passage of time (clock pulse count number or interrupt counter value). Decrement the value of the counter. Then, the main control CPU 72 controls the variable display of the special symbols as described above while referring to the value of the timer counter until the value becomes 0. Then, when the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display processing (step S4000) as the next jump destination.

In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the stop display of the special symbol based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (steps S2404, S2407, and S2410 in FIG. 19). In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be sent to the production control device 124. The symbol stop command is sent to the production control device 124 in the production control output process described above. When the stopped symbols are displayed for a predetermined period of time during the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag.

[Special symbol stop display processing]
Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of special symbol stop display processing. Each step will be explained below.

Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrements by the interrupt period).

Step S4200: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has ended based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not ended yet (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process and jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 18) and repeatedly executes the special symbol stop display process in the next interrupt cycle.

On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4250.

Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command and a stop display time end command. The symbol stop command and the stop display time end command are sent to the production control device 124 in the production control output process described above. Also, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag here. The "stop display time end command" is a command indicating that the stop display time of the special symbol has ended (elapsed).

Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU 72 checks whether the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set. If the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4350.

[ In case of jackpot ]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to "variable winning device management process". Note that the main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting various functions to non-operation in this process. Specifically, the time saving function is deactivated. As a result, before the special game (big win) is started, the state is shifted to the normal state (non-time saving state).

When the above procedure is completed at the time of a jackpot, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process.

[ In case of other than jackpot ]
On the other hand, in cases other than the jackpot, the following procedure is executed.
That is, if the main control CPU 72 determines in step S4300 that the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is not set (No), then it executes step S4600.

Step S4600: The main control CPU 72 then checks whether the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set. Then, if the value of the small hit flag (01H) is not set and the win is simply a loss (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4602.

Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the address of the special symbol variation pre-processing as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Step S4605: On the other hand, if the value of the small win flag (01H) is set (Step S4600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the address of the variable winning device management process as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Step S4610: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the number cut counter. In the "time-cutting counter", a counter value related to the "time-saving state" is set in the time-saving count area of the RAM 76. In this embodiment, a so-called number-cutting time reduction function is adopted, and when transitioning to the "time reduction state", the first number-cutting counter value regarding the time reduction state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 1 time). , the second count counter value related to the time reduction state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 5 times).

Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the loaded counter value (first count counter value or second count count value) is 0. At this time, if the number-cutting counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, if the number-of-times counter value is not 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4630.

Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements (subtracts by 1) the first number cutting counter value and the second number cutting counter value. Specifically, when the second special symbol is being stopped and displayed, both the first number cutting counter value and the second number cutting counter value are decremented, and when the first special symbol is being stopped and displayed, decrements only the second rounding counter value.

Step S4640: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the result of subtracting any of the number-cutting counter values (the first number-cutting counter value or the second number-cutting counter value) is zero. As a result of the subtraction, if any of the number-cutting counter values is not 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, if any one of the count counter values is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 resets the flag when the count cut function is activated. In this embodiment, the number-of-times counter value related to the time reduction state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 1 time or 5 times). Therefore, one missed variation of the second special symbol (including the small hit variation when the specific area is not passed) is executed in the time shortened state (the specified conditions regarding the number of times are met) , the time saving function activation flag is reset. On the other hand, even if the first special symbol misses one time in the time shortening state, the time shortening function activation flag is not reset, and after that, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed four times in the time shortening state. When the deviation variation is executed (the prescribed conditions regarding the number of times are met), the time saving function activation flag is reset. As a result, the time reduction state ends after the special symbol is stopped and displayed (setting end means). When the above procedure is completed, the process returns to the special symbol game process.

[Display output management processing]
Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 13) executed in the interrupt management process. The display output management process includes special symbol display setting processing (step S1200), normal symbol display setting processing (step S1210), status display setting processing (step S1220), working memory display setting processing (step S1230), and continuous operation count display setting. The configuration includes a subroutine group of processing (step S1240).

Of these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the working memory display setting process (step S1230) are performed on the first special symbol display device 34, the second Generate and output drive signals to be applied to each LED of the special symbol display device 35, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a. This is the process of

The status display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation count display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting drive signals to be applied to each LED of the gaming status display device 38. First, in the status display setting process, the main control CPU 72 controls lighting of the time saving status display lamp 38e according to the value of the time saving function activation flag. For example, if the time saving function activation flag is set to a value (01H) when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control CPU 72 will turn on the time saving status display lamp 38e regardless of whether the power is turned on or not. A lighting signal is output to the corresponding LED. Further, the main control CPU 72 controls lighting of the firing position designation display lamp 38f according to the special game management status. For example, when the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 are activated due to a jackpot game or a small winning game, the main control CPU 72 sends a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation display lamp 38f. Output. Furthermore, if the value (01H) is set in the time saving function activation flag, the main control CPU 72 sends a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation indicator lamp 38f in addition to the above-mentioned time saving status display lamp 38e. Output. In addition, when the firing position designation display lamp 38f shifts to the "time reduction state" after the jackpot game, it lights up from the start of the jackpot game until the "time reduction state" ends, and turns off when the "time reduction state" ends. (OFF).

The main control CPU 72 also controls lighting of the jackpot type display lamps 38a and 38b in the continuous operation count display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal for either the jackpot type display lamp 38a or 38b based on the value of the above-mentioned continuous operation count status. At this time, the target for outputting the lighting signal is one of the display lamps 38a, 38b corresponding to the jackpot symbol designated by the value of the continuous operation count status. For example, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "16 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38b representing "16 rounds (16R)". Further, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "15 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38a representing "15 rounds (15R)".

[Variable winning device management process]
Next, details of the variable winning device management process will be explained. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of variable winning device management processing. The variable winning device management process includes a gaming process selection process (step S5100), a grand prize opening pattern setting process (step S5200), a grand prize opening opening/closing operation process (step S5300), a grand prize opening closing process (step S5400), and an end. The configuration includes a subroutine group of processing (step S5500).

Step S5100: In the game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S5200 to S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and also sets the end of the variable winning device management process in the stack pointer as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening/closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 has not yet started, the main control CPU 72 sets the big winning opening pattern setting process (step S5200). On the other hand, if the big winning hole opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the big winning hole opening/closing operation process (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and the big winning hole opening/closing operation process is completed. If so, the big winning opening closing process (step S5400) is selected as the next jump destination. Furthermore, when the grand prize opening/closing operation process and the grand prize opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of consecutive operations (number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 selects the end process (step S5500) as the next jump destination. . Each process will be explained in more detail below.

[Big prize opening pattern setting process]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the big winning opening opening pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of opening and closing operations of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 and the time of each opening at the time of a jackpot or a small hit, respectively. Each step will be explained below.

Step S5202: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set. As a result of this confirmation, if the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5203. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is not set (No), that is, if the value of the small win flag (01H) is set, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5204.

Step S5203: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot opening pattern setting process. In this process, the opening pattern of the jackpot opening corresponding to the winning symbol at the time of jackpot is set based on the jackpot symbol-specific opening pattern setting table. Note that the specific contents of the process will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 next executes step S5205.

Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes a large winning opening opening pattern setting process for small winning. In this process, the opening pattern of the big winning hole is set based on the opening pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of small hit. Note that the specific contents of the process will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 next executes step S5205.

Step S5205: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening/closing operation process, and returns to the variable winning device management process.

[Big prize opening pattern setting process when hitting the jackpot]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for setting a pattern for opening a jackpot at the time of a jackpot. The contents will be explained below along with an example procedure.

Step S5210: The main control CPU 72 operates the condition device and accessory continuous operation device. Here, the "condition device" is a device whose operation is a necessary condition for the operation of the accessory continuous operating device, and the "accessory continuous operating device" refers to the first variable prize winning device 30 and the second variable prize winning device 30. This is a device that can operate the variable winning device 31 continuously. In addition, the "condition device" and the "accessory continuous operation device" can also be used as control flags. Therefore, this means that the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 do not operate in the jackpot game unless this conditional device is activated. The main control CPU 72 next executes step S5212.

Step S5212: The main control CPU 72 sets "big winning combination start (during jackpot game)" as an internal state flag for control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation count status according to the type of jackpot symbol. In this embodiment, a value representing "15 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status regardless of the type of jackpot symbol. The main control CPU 72 also generates a status command indicating that the jackpot is in progress. A status command indicating that the jackpot is in progress is transmitted to the production control device 124 in the production control output process described above. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5214.

Step S5214: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot opening pattern selection process by symbol. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the opening pattern setting table for each jackpot symbol and selects an opening pattern corresponding to the type of winning symbol related to the special symbol. Here, the opening pattern represents a setting for operating the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31, and represents, for example, settings such as the number of rounds to be executed, opening time, and interval time. The main control CPU 72 next executes step S5216.

[Opening pattern setting table by symbol at jackpot]
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing an example of an opening pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of jackpot. This opening pattern setting table by symbol at jackpot defines the opening/closing operation pattern of the variable winning device (first variable winning device 30 or second variable winning device 31) to be operated for each round for each different winning symbol related to the special symbol. It is. Specifically, the following opening patterns for the grand prize opening are determined for each winning symbol.

[1st winning symbol]
When it corresponds to the first winning symbol, the type of variable winning device to be activated is the first variable winning device 30. Further, the number of rounds to be executed is 15, of which 5 rounds are rounds with balls in play. The opening time for opening the first grand prize opening 30b per round in rounds with balls put out is 29.0 seconds, and the opening time in rounds with no balls put out is 0.5 seconds. Further, the interval time provided between each round is 1.0 seconds (5.0 seconds between rounds with no balls put out).

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the first winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the first variable prize winning device 30 operates for 29.0 seconds during each round from the first round to the fifth round. The operation opens the first big prize opening 30b (however, it is closed when the upper limit number of balls is confirmed. The same applies hereinafter), and from the 6th round to the 15th round, the first variable winning opening 30b is opened. is opened for 0.5 seconds. Therefore, if the first winning symbol is matched, it is possible to obtain balls for substantially five rounds.

[Second winning symbol]
When it corresponds to the second winning symbol, the type of variable winning device to be activated is the first variable winning device 30. Further, the number of rounds to be executed is 15, of which 5 rounds are rounds with balls in play. The opening time for opening the first grand prize opening 30b per round in rounds with balls put out is 29.0 seconds, and the opening time in rounds with no balls put out is 0.5 seconds. Further, the interval time provided between each round is 1.0 seconds (5.0 seconds between rounds with no balls put out).

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the second winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the first variable winning device 30 operates for 29.0 seconds during each round from the first round to the fifth round. The operation opens the first big prize opening 30b, and the first variable prize winning device 30 opens for 0.5 seconds from the 6th round to the 15th round. Therefore, if the second winning symbol is matched, it is possible to obtain balls for substantially five rounds.

[5th winning symbol]
When it corresponds to the fifth winning symbol, the type of variable winning device to be activated is the first variable winning device 30. Further, the number of rounds to be executed is 15, and 15 of these rounds are rounds in which balls are played. The opening time for opening the first grand prize opening 30b per round in a round with a ball being put out is 29.0 seconds. Further, the interval time provided between each round is 1.0 seconds.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the 5th winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the first variable winning device 30 operates for 29.0 seconds during each round from the 1st round to the 15th round. It operates and the first big prize opening 30b is opened. Therefore, if the fifth winning symbol falls, it is possible to obtain balls for substantially 15 rounds.

As described above, the main control CPU 72 refers to the jackpot symbol-specific opening pattern setting table and sets the jackpot opening pattern corresponding to the type of winning symbol.

[See Figure 29: Big prize opening pattern setting process when hitting a jackpot]
Step S5216: The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the first variable prize winning device 30. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the type of variable winning device to be operated in each round (from the first round to the final round) during the jackpot game to the first variable winning device 30 based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol. do. In addition, in this embodiment, the opening pattern corresponding to all the winning symbols at the time of jackpot (first winning symbol, second winning symbol, fifth winning symbol) is the first big winning hole 30b from the 1st round to the final round. Since it is released, the operation of the first variable prize winning device 30 is set. The main control CPU 72 next executes step S5218.

Step S5218: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of rounds to be executed. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of rounds to be executed during the jackpot game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol. In addition, in this embodiment, 15 rounds are set as the number of execution rounds of the opening pattern corresponding to all winning symbols (first winning symbol, second winning symbol, fifth winning symbol) at the time of jackpot. The main control CPU 72 next executes step S5220.

Step S5220: The main control CPU 72 sets a jackpot release timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) for opening the jackpot for each round at the time of jackpot. In addition, in this embodiment, it is set for each round based on the opening time of the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol (first winning symbol, second winning symbol, fifth winning symbol) at the time of jackpot. For example, in the case of the first winning symbol, the opening time for opening the first grand prize opening 30b is set to 29.0 seconds for rounds with balls dispensed, and the opening time of the first grand prize opening 30b for rounds without balls dispensed. The opening time for opening is set to 0.5 seconds. Therefore, if the value of the opening timer is set to about 29.0 seconds, the opening time is sufficient time for the ball to easily enter the first prize opening 30b during one opening (for example, firing The control board set 174 shoots 10 or more game balls (preferably 6 seconds or more). On the other hand, if the value of the opening timer is set to about 0.5 seconds, the opening time becomes a time during which it is difficult for the ball to enter the first big prize opening 30b during one opening. The main control CPU 72 next executes step S5222.

Step S5222: The main control CPU 72 sets a jackpot interval timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a waiting time (interval timer) between rounds at the time of a jackpot. In addition, in this embodiment, the interval timer of the opening pattern corresponding to all the winning symbols at the time of jackpot (first winning symbol, second winning symbol, fifth winning symbol) is 1.0 seconds (between rounds without balls). is set to 5.0 seconds). For example, after the opening of the first big prize opening 30b between the first round and the second round is completed and the opening is temporarily closed, an interval timer of about 1.0 seconds is set. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5224.

Step S5224: The main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation count command. The continuous operation number command can be generated based on the number of execution rounds set in the previous process (step S5218). Therefore, based on the execution round number "15R" of the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbols (first winning symbol, second winning symbol, fifth winning symbol) at the time of jackpot, the continuous operation number command represents "15 rounds". A value is generated. The generated continuous operation number command is sent to the production control device 124 in the production control output process described above.

After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the big winning opening pattern setting process (FIG. 28).

[Small winning big prize opening pattern setting process]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for setting a pattern for opening a large winning opening at the time of a small hit. The procedure will be explained below using an example procedure.

Step S5252: The main control CPU 72 sets "small winning start (small winning game in progress)" as an internal state flag for control. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a status command indicating that a small winning game is in progress. A status command indicating that a small winning game is in progress is transmitted to the production control device 124 in the production control output process described above. The main control CPU 72 next executes step S5254.

Step S5254: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit release pattern selection process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the small hit release pattern setting table and selects the release pattern. Here, the opening pattern represents a setting for operating the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31, and represents, for example, settings such as the number of openings, the opening time, the interval time, and the opening time of the specific area 31x. ing. The main control CPU 72 next executes step S5256.

[Small hit release pattern setting table]
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of a small hit release pattern setting table. This small winning opening pattern setting table defines the opening/closing operation pattern of the variable winning device (second variable winning device 31). In addition, in this embodiment, the number of opening patterns set at the time of a small hit is one, but a plurality of opening patterns may be defined for each winning symbol.

In the case of a small win, the type of variable winning device to be activated is the second variable winning device 31. Further, the number of times the second variable winning device 31 is opened is two times, and the time period for each opening is 0.9 seconds. Note that the interval time is set to, for example, about 1.0 seconds.

The opening start time of the specific area 31x (the timing at which the specific area solenoid 99 is turned on and the specific area slide member 31c is operated) is 0.2 seconds after the second variable winning device 31 starts opening.
Further, the end time of opening of the specific area 31x (the timing at which the specific area solenoid 99 is turned OFF and the specific area slide member 31c is deactivated) is 1.8 seconds after the second variable winning device 31 starts opening. .

[See Figure 31: Setting process for opening the large prize opening when a small hit occurs]
Step S5256: The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the second variable winning device 31. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the type of variable winning device to be operated during the small winning game to the second variable winning device 31 based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small winning. The main control CPU 72 next executes step S5258.

Step S5258: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of times of opening. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of openings to be executed during the small winning game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small winning. In this embodiment, two times is set as the number of openings of the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. Main control CPU 72 next executes step S5260.

Step S5260: The main control CPU 72 sets a small hit release timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) for each opening of the big winning hole based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small winning. In this embodiment, 0.9 seconds is set based on the opening time of the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. The main control CPU 72 next executes step S5262.

Step S5262: The main control CPU 72 sets a small hit interval timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the waiting time (interval timer) between openings of the big winning opening based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small winning. Note that in this embodiment, the interval timer is set to a predetermined time (for example, 1.0 seconds). The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5264.

Step S5264: The main control CPU 72 sets an opening timer for the specific area 31x (specific area slide member 31c). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) of the specific area 31x during the small winning game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small winning. In this embodiment, the specific area 31x is opened 0.2 seconds after the second variable winning device 31 starts opening, and the specific area 31x is closed 1.8 seconds after the second variable winning device 31 starts opening. be done.

After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the big winning opening pattern setting process (FIG. 28).

[Big prize opening opening/closing operation processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the opening/closing operation process of the big winning opening. This process is mainly for controlling the opening and closing operations of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31. The following is a step-by-step explanation.

Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the current internal state is "in a big role". Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer of the RAM 76, and determines whether the current internal state is "during a big win (during jackpot game)" depending on whether or not the internal state flag for control is set. Check to see if it is currently in a major role. In addition, the flag "during a big win (during a jackpot game)" is set by the main control CPU 72 during the previous process (during the jackpot opening pattern setting process: step S5212) or during the process when passing through a specific area, which will be described later. . As a result of this confirmation, if the current internal state is "in a big role" (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5306. On the other hand, if the current internal state is not "big win" (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5304.

Step S5304: The main control CPU72 executes the second big prize opening opening/closing operation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the second variable winning device 31 to open and close the second big winning opening 31b based on the set opening pattern (applying voltage to the second big winning opening solenoid 97 output the drive signal). Note that the specific contents of the process will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S5306: The main control CPU72 executes the first big prize opening opening/closing operation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the first variable winning device 30 to open and close the first big winning opening 30b based on the set opening pattern (applying voltage to the first big winning opening solenoid 90) output the drive signal). Note that the specific contents of the process will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process (FIG. 27).

[Second grand prize opening opening/closing operation process]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the second big prize opening opening/closing operation process. The contents will be explained below along with an example procedure.

Step S5310: The main control CPU72 opens the second big prize opening 31b. Specifically, a drive signal to be applied to the second big prize opening solenoid 97 is output. As a result, the second variable winning device 31 is activated and shifts from the closed state to the open state. Moreover, when the first release in a round is performed, the main control CPU 72 generates a special electric 2 release command. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5312.

Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 executes release timer countdown processing. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the opening timer set in the previous process (step S5260 and step S5264 of the small winning big winning opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 31)). In addition, in this process, in addition to the release timer related to the opening of the second big winning a prize opening 31b, a countdown is performed regarding the release timer (opening start time, opening end time) related to the opening of the specific area 31x. The main control CPU 72 next executes step S5314.

Step S5314: The main control CPU 72 executes specific area opening/closing operation processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the specific area slide member 31c to open and close the specific area 31x based on the set opening pattern (outputs a drive signal to be applied to the specific area solenoid 99). Perform processing. Note that the specific contents of the process will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 next executes step S5316.

Step S5316: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the opening time of the second big prize opening 31b has ended. Specifically, it is checked whether or not the value of the open timer for the second big winning hole 31b during the countdown process is 0 or less. As a result of this confirmation, if the opening time of the second big prize opening 31b has ended (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5322. On the other hand, if the opening time of the second big prize opening 31b has not ended (No), the main control CPU72 next executes step S5318.

Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 executes winning ball count processing. In this process, the number of game balls won in the second variable prize winning device 31 (opened big prize opening) during the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the count value based on the winning detection signal inputted from the second count switch 85 during the open time. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5320.

Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the current count is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number determines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of winning balls) that is allowed per opening at the time of small winning as described above. If the count number has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the jump destination is currently set to the big winning opening/closing operation process, so the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the steps S5310 to S5320 described above.

If it is determined in the above step S5316 that the open time has ended (Yes), or if it is confirmed that the count number has reached the predetermined number in step S5320 (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5322. In addition, since the value of the release timer is set to a short time (for example, 1.8 seconds) for release at the time of a small hit, the main control CPU 72 normally indicates that the count number has reached a predetermined number in step S5310. In most cases, it is determined in step S5316 that the open time has ended before checking.

Step S5322: The main control CPU72 closes the second big prize opening 31b. Specifically, the output of the drive signal that was being applied to the second big prize opening solenoid 97 is stopped. As a result, the second variable winning device 31 returns from the open state to the closed state. Further, at the time of closing corresponding to the final opening within a round, the main control CPU 72 generates a special electric 2 closing command here. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5324.

Step S5324: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the specific area passage flag is ON. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76 and checks whether the specific area passing flag is ON based on whether the value of the specific area passing flag is 01H. As a result of this confirmation, if the specific area passage flag is ON (Yes), that is, if the game ball passes through the specific area 31x while the second big prize opening 31b is open during the small winning game, the main The control CPU 72 then executes step S5326. On the other hand, if the specific area passage flag is not ON (No), that is, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 31x while the second big prize opening 31b is open during the small winning game, the main control The CPU 72 then executes step S5327a. Note that the specific area passing flag may be set to ON during the previous specific area opening/closing operation process (step S5314).

Step S5326: The main control CPU 72 executes a process when passing through a specific area. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device based on the fact that the game ball passed through the specific area 31x while the second big prize opening 31b was open during the small winning game. , executes a process of continuously operating the first variable winning device 30, that is, a process of starting a jackpot game (special game via special game execution means, special game execution means). Note that the specific contents of the process will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5328.

Step S5327a: The main control CPU 72 executes interval standby processing. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the interval timer set in the previous process (step S5262 of the small winning big winning opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 31)). Then, when the value of the interval timer becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 next proceeds to step S5327b. Although not particularly illustrated here, until the interval time elapses (until the interval timer value becomes 0), the main control CPU 72 controls the variable winning device management that is the caller from step S5327a for each interrupt. Return to the end address of the process (FIG. 27). Then, when the big prize opening opening/closing operation process is executed in the next call, step S5327a is executed directly instead of from the first step S5310.

Step S5327b: The main control CPU72 increments the value of the second big prize opening number counter. In addition, the value of the second big prize opening number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example.

Step S5327c: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the value of the second big prize opening number counter after incrementing has reached the set number of times within the current round. Here, the reason why the "number of times set in the current round" is determined is to correspond to the opening pattern of "opening the second variable winning device 31 multiple times during one small win", for example. It is. In addition, especially if such an opening pattern is not adopted, the "number of times set in the current round" is set to once in each round, so the counter value will change with one opening/closing operation. Since the set number of times has been reached (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5328.

On the other hand, if the opening pattern of "opening the second variable winning device 31 multiple times during one small win" is adopted, the counter value has not yet reached the set number of times at the end of one opening. There will be no (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process, since the jump destination is currently set to the big winning opening/closing operation process, the steps from step S5310 to step S5327b described above are repeatedly executed. As a result, the opening number counter is incremented in step S5327b, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (step S5327c; Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5328.

Step S5328: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning hole closing process, and returns to the big winning hole opening/closing operation process (FIG. 33). Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 executes the big winning opening closing process.

In addition, each command generated in step S5310 and step S5322 is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 13) executed in response to a timer interruption. In addition, in this procedure example, the special electricity 2 opening command is generated when the second grand prize opening 31b is opened for the first time in a round, and the special electricity 2 closing command is generated when the second grand prize opening 31b is finally closed within a round. However, the special electricity 2 release command is generated every time the second grand prize opening 31b is opened in step S5310, and the special electricity 2 opening command is generated every time the second grand prize opening 31b is closed in step S5322. A configuration may be adopted in which a closing command is generated every time.

[Specific area opening/closing operation processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for specific area opening/closing operation processing. The contents will be explained below along with an example procedure.

Step S5330: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the opening time of the specific area 31x has started. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the release timer regarding the release start time regarding the release of the specific area 31x that was counted down in the countdown process (step S5312) is 0. Check whether the opening time of 31x has started. As a result of this confirmation, if the opening time of the specific area 31x has started (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5332. On the other hand, if the opening time of the specific area 31x has not started (No) or if it has already been opened, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5334.

Step S5332: The main control CPU 72 opens the specific area 31x. Specifically, a drive signal to be applied to the specific area solenoid 99 is output. As a result, the specific area slide member 31c operates, and the specific area 31x shifts from the closed state to the open state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5334.

Step S5334: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the storage area of the RAM 76 and checks whether the specific area reserve flag is turned on. As a result of this confirmation, if it is confirmed that the specific area preliminary flag is ON and the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5336. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the specific area preliminary flag is OFF and the game ball has not passed through the specific area 31x (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5338.

Step S5336: The main control CPU 72 sets the specific area passing flag to ON. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76 and sets the value of the specific area passage flag to 01H. The main control CPU 72 next executes step S5338. Note that the specific area passage flag and specific area reserve flag are reset at the end of the jackpot game.

Step S5338: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the opening time of the specific area 31x has ended. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 determines the opening time of the specific area 31x by checking whether the value of the opening timer regarding the opening of the specific area 31x that has been counted down in the countdown process (step S5312) is 0. Check whether it has finished. As a result of this confirmation, if the opening time of the specific area 31x has ended (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5340. On the other hand, if the opening time of the specific area 31x has not ended (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the second big prize opening opening/closing operation process (FIG. 34).

Step S5340: The main control CPU 72 closes the specific area 31x. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the specific area solenoid 99 is stopped. As a result, the specific area slide member 31c returns from the open state (operating state) to the closed state (non-operating state).

After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the second big prize opening/closing operation process (FIG. 34).

[Processing when passing through a specific area]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for processing when passing through a specific area. The contents will be explained below along with an example procedure.

Step S5350: The main control CPU 72 resets the small hit flag. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76 and resets the value of the small hit flag to 00H. The main control CPU 72 next executes step S5352.

Step S5352: The main control CPU72 ends the small winning game. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 deletes "small winning game in progress" from the internal state flag, and ends the small winning game in the control process (small winning end). The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5354.

Step S5354: The main control CPU 72 operates the condition device and accessory continuous operation device. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 can be operated continuously, and the jackpot game can be started. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5356.

Step S5356: The main control CPU 72 sets "big winning combination start (during jackpot game)" as an internal state flag for control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation count status according to the type of winning symbol. In this embodiment, a value representing "16 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status regardless of the type of winning symbol. The main control CPU 72 also generates a status command indicating that the jackpot is in progress. A status command indicating that the jackpot is in progress is transmitted to the production control device 124 in the production control output process described above. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5358.

Step S5358: The main control CPU 72 executes a pattern-specific opening pattern selection process when passing through a specific area. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the opening pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area, and selects the opening pattern corresponding to the type of winning symbol when the small hit occurs. Main control CPU 72 then executes step S5360.

Step S5360: The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the first variable winning device 30. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 operates a variable winning device that is operated every round (from the second round to the final round) during the jackpot game based on the release pattern corresponding to the winning symbol regarding the special symbol when a small win occurs. The type is set in the first variable winning device 30. The main control CPU 72 next executes step S5362.

Step S5362: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of rounds to be executed. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of rounds to be executed during the jackpot game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small win occurs. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of execution rounds of the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbols (3rd winning symbol, 4th winning symbol, 6th winning symbol) related to special symbols when all small wins are applied is 16 rounds. is set. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5364.

Step S5364: The main control CPU 72 sets a jackpot release timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) for opening the jackpot for each round at the time of jackpot. In addition, in this embodiment, based on the opening time of the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol (3rd winning symbol, 4th winning symbol, 6th winning symbol) related to the special symbol when it corresponds to a small hit, each round is is set to For example, in the case of the third winning symbol, the opening time for opening the first grand prize opening 30b is set to 29.0 seconds for rounds with balls being dispensed, and the opening time for opening the first grand prize opening 30b for rounds without balls being dispensed. The opening time for opening is set to 0.5 seconds. Therefore, if the value of the opening timer is set to about 29.0 seconds, the opening time is sufficient time for the ball to easily enter the first prize opening 30b during one opening (for example, firing The control board set 174 shoots 10 or more game balls (preferably 6 seconds or more). On the other hand, if the value of the opening timer is set to about 0.5 seconds, the opening time becomes a time during which it is difficult for the ball to enter the first big prize opening 30b during one opening. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5366.

Step S5366: The main control CPU 72 sets a jackpot interval timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a waiting time (interval timer) between rounds at the time of a jackpot. In addition, in this embodiment, the interval timer of the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbols (3rd winning symbol, 4th winning symbol, 6th winning symbol) regarding the special symbol when it corresponds to a small hit is 1.0 seconds ( (5.0 seconds) is set between rounds with no balls put out. For example, after the opening of the first big prize opening 30b between the second and third rounds is completed and the opening is temporarily closed, an interval timer of about 1.0 seconds is set. The main control CPU 72 next executes step S5368.

Step S5368: The main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation count command. The continuous operation number command can be generated based on the number of execution rounds set in the previous process (step S5362). Therefore, based on the execution round number "16R" of the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol (3rd winning symbol, 4th winning symbol, 6th winning symbol) related to the special symbol when a small hit occurs, the continuous operation number command is A value representing "16 rounds" is generated. The generated continuous operation number command is sent to the production control device 124 in the production control output process described above. Main control CPU 72 next executes step S5370.

Step S5370: The main control CPU 72 executes a time reduction function setting process for each symbol when passing through a specific area. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the time reduction function activation flag to ON only when the winning symbol related to the special symbol at the time of the small hit is the "4th winning symbol" (time reduction state transition means, time saving function activation means, game state setting means). In addition, in this embodiment, only when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x corresponding to the "fourth winning symbol", the time reduction state is always entered. In some cases, the transition may be made to the time shortening state.

After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the second big prize opening/closing operation process (FIG. 34).

[Opening pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area]
FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of an opening pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area. This opening pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area defines the opening/closing operation pattern of the first variable winning device 30 for each round for each different winning symbol related to a special symbol when a small hit occurs. Specifically, the following opening patterns for the grand prize opening are determined for each winning symbol.

[3rd winning symbol]
When the game ball passes through the specific area 31x corresponding to the third winning symbol, the type of variable winning device to be activated is the first variable winning device 30. Further, the number of execution rounds is 16 rounds. Note that this number of rounds to be executed includes the operation of the second variable prize winning device 31 that was opened by a small hit, so in the jackpot game that will start from now on, 15 rounds will be obtained by subtracting 1 round from 16 rounds. This is the actual number of rounds in a jackpot game (hereinafter, the same applies to the 4th winning symbol and the 6th winning symbol). Also, 5 out of 15 rounds are rounds with balls in play. The opening time for opening the first grand prize opening 30b per round in rounds with balls put out is 29.0 seconds, and the opening time in rounds with no balls put out is 0.5 seconds. Further, the interval time provided between each round is 1.0 seconds (5.0 seconds between rounds with no balls put out).

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol when a small hit is applied is the third winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the opening of the second variable winning device 31 due to the small winning is set as the first round. Therefore, from the 2nd round to the 6th round, the first variable winning device 30 operates for 29.0 seconds during each round to open the first big prize opening 30b, and from the 7th round to the 16th round, the 1 variable prize winning device 30 is opened for 0.5 seconds. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x in accordance with the third winning symbol, it is possible to obtain balls for five rounds.

[4th winning symbol]
When the game ball passes through the specific area 31x corresponding to the fourth winning symbol, the type of variable winning device to be activated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of rounds to be executed is 16 rounds (the actual number of rounds in a jackpot game is 15 rounds), and 10 of these rounds are rounds with balls being put out. The opening time for opening the first grand prize opening 30b per round in rounds with balls put out is 29.0 seconds, and the opening time in rounds with no balls put out is 0.5 seconds. Further, the interval time provided between each round is 1.0 seconds (5.0 seconds between rounds with no balls put out).

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol when it corresponds to a small hit is the fourth winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the opening of the second variable winning device 31 due to the small winning is set as the first round. Therefore, from the 2nd round to the 11th round, the first variable winning device 30 operates for 29.0 seconds during each round to open the first big prize opening 30b, and from the 12th round to the 16th round, the 1 variable prize winning device 30 is opened for 0.5 seconds. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the specific area corresponding to the fourth winning symbol, it is possible to obtain balls for 10 rounds.

[6th winning symbol]
When the game ball passes through the specific area 31x corresponding to the sixth winning symbol, the type of variable winning device to be activated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of rounds to be executed is 16 rounds (the actual number of rounds in a jackpot game is 15 rounds), and 15 of these rounds are rounds with balls. The opening time for opening the first big prize opening 30b per round in rounds with balls being put out is 29.0 seconds, and the interval time provided between each round is 1.0 seconds.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small winning occurs is the 6th winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the first variable winning device 30 is set to 29.0 from the 2nd round to the 16th round. It operates for 0 seconds during each round to open the first big prize opening 30b. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the specific area in accordance with the sixth winning symbol, it is possible to obtain balls for 15 rounds.

As described above, the main control CPU 72 refers to the symbol-specific opening pattern setting table when passing through the specific area and sets the opening pattern of the big winning hole corresponding to the type of winning symbol regarding the special symbol when a small hit occurs. I will do it.

[First grand prize opening opening/closing operation process]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the first big prize opening opening/closing operation process. The procedure will be explained below using an example procedure.

Step S5380: The main control CPU72 opens the first big prize opening 30b. Specifically, a drive signal to be applied to the first big winning opening solenoid 90 is output. As a result, the first variable prize winning device 30 operates and shifts from the closed state to the open state. Moreover, at the first release in a round, the main control CPU 72 generates a special electric 1 release command. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5382.

Step S5382: The main control CPU 72 executes release timer countdown processing. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets in the previous process (step S5220 of the jackpot opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 29) or step S5364 in the process when passing through a specific area (in FIG. 36)). Executes the release timer countdown. The main control CPU 72 next executes step S5386.

Step S5386: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the opening time of the first big prize opening 30b has ended. Specifically, it is checked whether the value of the open timer for the first big winning hole 30b after the countdown process is 0 or less. As a result of this confirmation, if the opening time of the first big prize opening 30b has ended (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5392. On the other hand, if the opening time of the first big prize opening 30b has not ended (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5388.

Step S5388: The main control CPU 72 executes winning ball count processing. In this process, the number of game balls that have won in the first variable prize winning device 30 (opened big prize opening) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the count value based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 during the open time. Main control CPU 72 next executes step S5390.

Step S5390: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of prize balls (upper limit of the number of prize balls) allowed per opening (one round during jackpot) as described above. If the count number has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the jump destination is currently set to the big winning opening/closing operation process, so the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the steps S5380 to S5390 described above.

If it is determined in the above step S5386 that the open time has ended (Yes), or if it is confirmed that the count number has reached the predetermined number in step S5390 (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5392. In addition, in the case of a round with no balls released due to the release at the time of a jackpot, the value of the release timer is set to a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds), so the main control CPU 72 normally sets the count number in step S5390. In most cases, it is determined in step S5386 that the open time has ended before confirming that the predetermined number has been reached.

Step S5392: The main control CPU72 closes the first big prize opening 30b. Specifically, the output of the drive signal that was being applied to the first big prize opening solenoid 90 is stopped. As a result, the first variable prize winning device 30 returns from the open state to the closed state. Moreover, at the time of closing corresponding to the final opening within a round, the main control CPU 72 generates a special electric 1 closing command here. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5394.

Step S5394: The main control CPU 72 executes interval standby processing. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets in the previous process (step S5222 of the jackpot opening pattern setting process (in Figure 29) or step S5366 in the process when passing through a specific area (in Figure 36)). Execute interval timer countdown. Then, when the value of the interval timer becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 next advances to step S5395. Although not particularly illustrated here, until the interval time elapses (until the interval timer value becomes 0), the main control CPU 72 controls the variable winning device management which is the caller from step S5394 for each interrupt. Return to the end address of the process (FIG. 27). Then, when the big prize opening opening/closing operation process is executed in the next call, step S5394 is executed directly instead of from the first step S5380.

Step S5395: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the open count counter. The value of the open count counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with an initial value of 0.

Step S5396: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the value of the open count counter after incrementing has reached the set count within the current round. Here, the reason why the "number of times set within the current round" is determined is to correspond to an opening pattern such as "opening the first variable winning device 30 multiple times within one round during a jackpot". It is. Note that this embodiment does not particularly adopt such an opening pattern, so the "number of times set within the current round" is set to once in each round. Therefore, since the counter value normally reaches the set number of times in one opening/closing operation (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5398.

Note that if a pattern is adopted in which the opening and closing operations are repeated multiple times within one round as described above, the counter value has not yet reached the set number of times at the end of one opening (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process, the jump destination is currently set to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process, so the steps from step S5380 to step S5390 described above are repeatedly executed. As a result, the opening number counter is incremented in step S5395, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5398.

Step S5398: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning hole closing process, and returns to the big winning hole opening/closing operation process (FIG. 33). Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 executes the big winning opening closing process.

In addition, each command generated in step S5380 and step S5392 is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 13) executed in response to a timer interruption. In addition, in this procedure example, the special electricity 1 opening command is generated when the first big prize opening 30b is opened for the first time in a round, and the special electricity 1 closing command is generated when the first big winning opening 30b is finally closed in a round. However, the special electricity 1 release command is generated every time the first big prize opening 30b is opened in step S5380, and the special electricity 1 release command is generated every time the first big prize opening 30b is closed in step S5392. A configuration may be adopted in which a closing command is generated every time.

[Big prize opening closing process]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the big winning opening closing process. This big winning opening closing process is for continuing or terminating the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31. The following is a step-by-step explanation.

Step S5401: First, the main control CPU 72 checks whether the current game is in a big win (jackpot game), and if it is in a big win (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5402.

Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter described above. As a result, for example, when the first round ends and the second round begins, the value of the round number counter becomes "1". In addition, if the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game and the jackpot game is started after the small win ends, the opening of the second big prize opening 31b at the time of the small win is treated as the first round, and the jackpot is played. The first round in which the game starts is treated as the second round.

Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the value of the round number counter after incrementing has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value (1 to 15) of the round number counter after incrementing, and if the value is less than the set execution round number (14 or 15 after subtracting 1), ( No), then step S5405 is executed.

Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the current round number counter value. This command is sent to the production control device 124 in the production control output process as described above. The production control device 124 can confirm the current number of rounds based on the received round number command.

Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big prize opening opening/closing operation process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process.

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, in the game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 27), the main control CPU 72 executes the big winning opening opening/closing operation process which is the next jump destination. After executing the big winning opening opening/closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 executes the big winning opening closing process again, and repeats steps S5402 to S5408. As a result, the opening/closing operation of the first variable prize winning device 30 is continuously executed until the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (15 or 16).

If the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5410.

Step S5410, Step S5412: In this case, the main control CPU 72 resets the round number counter (=0) and sets the next jump destination to the end process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, the next time the main control CPU 72 executes the variable winning device management process, the end process will be selected.

[When small hit]
On the other hand, in the case of a small hit, the following procedure is followed (special operation execution means).
Step S5411: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the current game is not in the big prize (step S5401: No), it increments the value of the opening number counter.

Step S5413: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether the value of the incremented opening number counter has reached the set number of openings. The number of openings is the one set in the previous small winning big winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5258 in FIG. 31). If the value of the opening number counter has not yet reached the set number of openings (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5416.

Step S5416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big prize opening opening/closing operation process.
Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process.

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, in the game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 27), the main control CPU 72 executes the big winning opening opening/closing operation process which is the next jump destination. Then, after executing the big winning opening opening/closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 executes the big winning opening closing process again, and goes through the above steps S5401 to S5413 (No) to step S5416. , step S5408 is repeatedly executed. Thereby, the opening/closing operation of the second variable prize winning device 31 is repeatedly executed until the actual number of openings reaches the set number of openings.

When the actual number of openings at the time of a small hit reaches the set number of openings (step S5413: Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5414.

Step S5414, Step S5412: In this case, the main control CPU 72 resets the open count counter (=0) and sets the next jump destination to the end process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, the next time the main control CPU 72 executes the variable winning device management process, the end process will be selected.

〔End processing〕
FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for termination processing. This termination process is for arranging conditions for terminating the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31. The procedure will be explained below using an example procedure.

Step S5502: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the jackpot flag value (01H) is set, and if the jackpot flag value is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5503. do.

Step S5503, Step S5504: In this case, the main control CPU 72 resets the jackpot flag (00H). As a result, the jackpot gaming state ends under the control process of the main control CPU 72. Moreover, the main control CPU 72 erases "during jackpot" from the internal state flag, and ends the jackpot game in the control process (end of jackpot). Note that the main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation count status.

Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether the value of the time saving function activation flag is 01H (set). This flag is used in the jackpot and other setting processing (step S2414 in FIG. 19) during the special symbol fluctuation pre-processing, and the time reduction function setting processing for each symbol when passing through a specific area during the processing when passing through a specific area (see Fig. 19). This is set in step S5370) in 36.

Step S5512: Then, when the value of the time saving function activation flag is 01H (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of time saving times (for example, 1 time (or 5 times)) (gaming state setting means). The value of the set time saving number is stored in the time saving count area of the RAM 76 as described above. The number of time reductions set here becomes the upper limit number of times to shorten the variation time of special symbols in subsequent games. In this embodiment, in order to manage the number of time reductions, number cut counter values (a first time cut counter value and a second time cut counter value) regarding two types of time reduction states are prepared. Here, the first number-cutting counter value is a variable that is decremented (subtracted by 1) each time the second special symbol changes once, and is set to "1" as an initial value. Further, the second number-cutting counter value is a variable that is decremented each time the first special symbol or the second special symbol changes once, and is set to "5" as an initial value. In addition, when the value of the time reduction function activation flag is not 01H (step S5510: No), the main control CPU72 does not execute step S5512 (game state setting means for setting a non-special game state).

Step S5514: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a status designation command based on the flag. Specifically, when the jackpot flag is reset or the jackpot ends, a state designation command representing "normal" as the gaming state is generated. Further, if the time reduction function activation flag is set, a state designation command representing "time reduction in progress" as an internal state is generated. These state designation commands are transmitted to the production control device 124 in production control output processing.

The procedure up to this point is for the case of a big hit, but in the case of a small hit (step S5502: No), the following procedure is executed.

Step S5520, Step S5522: In the case of a small win, the main control CPU 72 resets the value of the small win flag (00H) and also erases "Small win game in progress" from the internal state flag. Note that in the case of a small win, the internal conditional device does not operate, so this procedure is simply for the purpose of clearing the flag.

Step S5516: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening opening pattern setting process.

Step S5518: Then, the main control CPU72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 18) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol variation pre-process. After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process.

[Normal symbol game processing]
Next, details of the normal symbol game process executed in the interrupt management process (FIG. 13) will be explained. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the normal symbol game process.

The normal symbol game processing includes execution selection processing (step S1001), normal symbol fluctuation pre-processing (step S2001), normal symbol fluctuation processing (step S3001), normal symbol stop display processing (step S4001), and variable start winning device management. The configuration includes a subroutine group of processing (step S5001). Below, the basic flow of the normal game management process will be explained step by step.

Step S1001: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S2001 to S5001). For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the normal symbol game process as the return destination address in the "jump table". Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far (the value of the normal game management status). For example, if the normal symbol has not yet started fluctuating display, the main control CPU 72 selects the normal symbol fluctuation pre-processing (step S2001) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the normal symbol fluctuation preprocessing has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the normal symbol fluctuation processing (step S3001) as the next jump destination, and if the normal symbol fluctuation processing has been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the normal symbol fluctuation processing (step S3001) as the next jump destination. The normal symbol stop display processing (step S4001) is selected as the jump destination.

In addition, in this embodiment, a process is selected by specifying a jump destination address in a "jump table", but apart from such a selection method, a "process flag" or a "process selection flag" etc. are used to select a process. There are also known programming examples where the CPU selects the next process to execute. In such a programming example, the CPU calls each process, and in the first step, refers to each flag and performs a conditional branch (continuation/return). However, in the selection method of this embodiment, the main control CPU 72 There is no need to call each process one by one.

Step S2001: In the normal symbol variation preprocessing, the main control CPU 72 performs work to prepare the conditions for starting the variable display of the normal symbols. More specifically, the main control CPU 72 uses the random number value stored in response to the game ball passing through the starting gate 20 in the normal symbol storage update process (step S24 in FIG. 14) during the switch input event process described above. (Normal symbol winning determination random number) is read out, and first, it is determined (operational lottery) whether or not it falls within a predetermined winning range (normal symbol lottery execution means, lottery execution means). Then, depending on the result of the determination (hit or miss), processing such as determining the stopping symbol and determining the fluctuation pattern is executed.

Step S3001: In the process during normal symbol variation, the main control CPU 72 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner. More specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs an ON or OFF drive signal that is changed over time to a plurality of lamps that constitute the normal symbol display device 33 while counting down the variable timer. By controlling the drive of the lamp in this manner, the normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the normal symbol display device 33 (symbol display device).

Step S4001: In the normal symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 stops and displays the normal symbols. More specifically, the main control CPU 72 sends a drive signal for lighting or extinguishing the plurality of lamps constituting the normal symbol display device 33 according to the mode of the stop symbol (hit or miss mode) determined in step S2001. Output. At this time, the pattern of the drive signal is constant depending on the winning or losing mode; for example, in a winning mode, all lamps are lit, while in a losing mode, a drive signal is output that lights only one lamp. By doing so, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. Note that this lighting mode is just an example, and the stop display may be performed in other modes.

Step S5001: Variable starting winning device management process (variable starting winning device control means) is selected when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning manner (for example, all lamps are lit) in the previous normal symbol stop displaying process. be done. When the normal symbols are stopped and displayed in a winning manner, in this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the variable start winning device 28, assuming that the operating conditions are satisfied. At this time, the main control CPU 72 generates a general power release command when the right starting winning hole 28b is opened (when opening starts), and generates a general power closing command when closing the right starting winning hole 28b (when opening ends). generate. In this embodiment, the number of openings of the right starting winning port 28b in one operation of the variable starting winning device 28 is one, so the opening start time coincides with the opening time, and the opening end time is the same as the opening time. It matches the time. In other words, the general power open command and the general power close command are each generated once for each operation of the variable start winning device 28.

Here, the right start winning hole 28b may be opened multiple times (for example, twice) for each operation of the variable start winning device 28, and in that case, the time when the opening starts coincides with the first opening. , the end of opening coincides with the final (for example, second) closing time. Therefore, when opening the right start winning port 28b multiple times per operation of the variable start winning device 28, the normal power open command is generated at the first opening, and the normal power close command is generated at the final time (for example, the second opening). It will be generated at the time of closing. In addition, it is good also as a structure which produces|generates a normal electricity open command every time the right starting prize opening 28b is opened, and generates a general electricity closing command every time the right starting winning opening 28b is closed.

In any case, each generated command is transmitted to the performance control device 124 (information output means) in the performance control output process (step S212 in FIG. 13) executed in response to a timer interrupt.

While the variable start winning device 28 is in operation, the jump destination is set to the variable start winning device management process (step S5001) in the previous execution selection process (step S1001), and the variable display of normal symbols is not performed. In addition, in the variable start winning device management process, the normal electric accessory solenoid 88 is energized for a predetermined period of time and a specified number of times (for example, once), and as a result, the variable start winning device 28 operates in a set pattern, and the right start winning device is activated. It becomes possible to win a prize in the mouth 28b.

[Normal symbol variation time/variable start winning device opening pattern]
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of the variation time of the normal symbol and the opening pattern of the variable start winning device 28.

(A) in FIG. 42: This is a table showing an example of the variation time of normal symbols. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a long time of, for example, 30 seconds in the non-time reduction state, whereas it is set to a very short time of, for example, 0.5 seconds in the time reduction state. Further, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 65535/65536 (≈1/1) regardless of whether the time is shortened or not.

(B) in FIG. 42: A diagram showing an example of an opening pattern of the variable start winning device 28. In the non-time shortened state, the opening time of the right start prize opening 28b is set to a very short time (short opening), for example, 0.06 seconds, and since the short opening is performed once, due to the structure, during opening, Even if it is possible for the game ball to enter the right starting prize opening 28b, it is very difficult for the ball to actually enter the ball (the opening/closing member 28b protrudes toward the front and receives the game ball). (to return to the closed position earlier). On the other hand, in the time shortening state, the opening time of the right start prize opening 28b is set to a relatively long time (long opening) of, for example, 0.9 seconds, and since the long opening is performed once, the game ball is It is possible to easily make the ball enter the right starting prize opening 28b (it is possible for the ball to enter the ball).

Therefore, in the time shortening state, it is possible to enter many game balls into the right start prize opening 28b while changing the normal symbols in a short time, and efficiently generate a lottery opportunity corresponding to the second special symbol ( It becomes possible to increase the memory of lottery elements.

[Game flow (Part 1)]
FIG. 43 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the first special symbol changes in the normal mode.
When starting a game with the pachinko machine 1, the game starts from [F1] normal mode (park mode). "Normal mode" is a "low probability non-time reduction state (non-special game state)", the winning probability of special symbols is "low probability state", and the winning probability of normal symbols is "low probability state" .

[F1] During the game in the normal mode, when the game ball enters the medium start winning hole 26 (in a state where the working memory of the 2nd special symbol does not exist and the working memory of the 1st special symbol exists) ), [F2] The first special symbol changes.

[F3] If the first special symbol lottery results in a "miss", the game will start over from the [F1] normal mode.

[F4] If the first special symbol lottery results in a "jackpot (winning probability 1/320)" and [F5] the first winning symbol corresponds to the first winning symbol, [F6] the jackpot game will be executed, but after the jackpot game ends, the jackpot will be played again. [F1] Return to normal mode.

[F4] If the first special symbol lottery results in a "jackpot (winning probability 1/320)" and [F7] corresponds to the second winning symbol, [F6] the jackpot game will be executed, and after the jackpot game ends, [F8] Shift to stadium mode. [F8] The stadium mode is a "low probability time reduction state (special game state)", the winning probability of special symbols is a "low probability state", and the winning probability of normal symbols is a "high probability state".

[F9] When the first special symbol lottery results in a "small win (winning probability 1/146)", [F10] corresponds to the third winning symbol, [F11] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small win game, [F6] A jackpot game is executed, and after the jackpot game ends, the game returns to [F1] normal mode again.

[F9] When the first special symbol lottery results in a "small win (winning probability 1/146)", [F12] corresponds to the fourth winning symbol, and [F11] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small win game, [F6] A jackpot game is executed, and after the jackpot game ends, the game shifts to [F1] stadium mode.

In this way, if you win the first special symbol lottery while staying in the normal mode (non-time saving state) and the second winning symbol or fourth winning symbol matches, after the jackpot game ends, Shift to stadium mode.

[Game flow (Part 2)]
FIG. 44 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the second special symbol changes in the normal mode. As mentioned above, since the normal mode is not in a time shortening state, it is very difficult to let the ball enter the right starting winning hole 28b, and the game ball is hit aiming at the middle starting winning hole 26 (executing left hitting). ) is generally used to advance the game. Therefore, it is extremely rare for a game to be played according to this game flow without going through the stadium mode, which will be described later, after starting a game on the pachinko machine 1.

[F1] During the game in the normal mode, when the game ball enters the right starting winning hole 28b (if the working memory of the second special symbol exists), [F22] the second special symbol changes.

[F23] If the second special symbol lottery results in a "miss", the game will start over from the [F1] normal mode.

[F24] If the second special symbol lottery results in a "jackpot (winning probability 1/320)" and [F25] the fifth winning symbol falls, [F6] the jackpot game will be executed, and after the jackpot game ends, the jackpot game will be played again [F1 ] Return to normal mode.

[F26] When the second special symbol lottery results in a "small win (winning probability 1/3)", [F27] corresponds to the 6th winning symbol, [F28] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small win game, [F6] A jackpot game is executed, and after the jackpot game ends, the game returns to [F1] normal mode again.

In this way, if the second special symbol changes while staying in the normal mode (non-time saving state), the final returns to normal mode again.

[Game flow (Part 3)]
FIG. 45 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the first special symbol changes in the stadium mode.
[F8] During the game in the stadium mode, when the game ball enters the medium start winning slot 26 (in a state where the working memory of the 2nd special symbol does not exist and the working memory of the 1st special symbol exists) ), [F2] The first special symbol changes.

[F3] If the first special symbol lottery results in a "miss", the game will start over from the [F8] stadium mode. However, in the case of a time saving final variation in which the time saving state ends, the normal mode is entered by the end of this deviation variation (symbol stop display time elapsed=determined stop display).

[F4] If the first special symbol lottery results in a "jackpot (winning probability 1/320)", [F5] if the first winning symbol corresponds to the first winning symbol, [F6] the jackpot game will be executed, and after the jackpot game ends, [F1] Shift to normal mode.

[F4] If the first special symbol lottery results in a "jackpot (winning probability 1/320)" and [F7] corresponds to the second winning symbol, [F6] the jackpot game will be executed, and after the jackpot game ends, [F8] Shift to stadium mode.

[F9] When the first special symbol lottery results in a "small win (winning probability 1/146)", [F10] corresponds to the third winning symbol, [F11] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small win game, [F6] A jackpot game is executed, and after the jackpot game ends, the mode shifts to [F1] normal mode.

[F9] When the first special symbol lottery results in a "small win (winning probability 1/146)", [F12] corresponds to the fourth winning symbol, and [F11] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small win game, [F6] A jackpot game is executed, and after the jackpot game ends, the game shifts to [F1] stadium mode.

In this way, if you win the first special symbol lottery while staying in the stadium mode (time-reduced state) and the second winning symbol or fourth winning symbol matches, the stadium after the jackpot game ends. mode continues.

[Game flow (Part 4)]
FIG. 46 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the second special symbol changes in the stadium mode.
[F8] During the game in the stadium mode, when the game ball enters the right starting winning hole 28b (if the working memory of the second special symbol exists), [F22] the second special symbol changes.

[F23] If the second special symbol lottery results in a "miss", the mode shifts to [F1] normal mode.

[F24] If the second special symbol lottery results in a "jackpot (winning probability 1/320)" and [F25] the fifth winning symbol falls, [F6] the jackpot game will be executed, and after the jackpot game ends, [F1] Shift to normal mode.

[F26] When the second special symbol lottery results in a "small win (winning probability 1/3)", [F27] corresponds to the 6th winning symbol, [F28] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small win game, [F6] A jackpot game is executed, and after the jackpot game ends, the mode shifts to [F1] normal mode.

In this way, if the second special symbol changes while staying in the stadium mode (time shortened state), whether it falls under a loss or one of the winning symbols, the final changes to normal mode. At this time, if the working memory of the second special symbol does not exist, the background image of the normal mode (image representing the park) that is displayed at the beginning of the game is displayed, whereas the second special symbol If the working memory exists, the background image representing the stadium will continue to be displayed, and an extension of the stadium mode will be performed. In either case, the stay mode has shifted to "normal mode."

[Example of produced image]
Next, the effect images actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained using several examples. As described above, when an internal lottery for a jackpot is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the fluctuation display using the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. (design display means). However, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol themselves are lit and flashed by 7-segment LEDs, they lack visual appeal. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, a variable display performance using performance symbols is performed.

The effect patterns include, for example, three effects: a left effect pattern, a middle effect pattern, and a right effect pattern, and these are displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (see FIG. 1). ). Each production pattern is, for example, a design of a picture card with characters attached to it along with the numbers "1" to "9". Here, the left performance symbols, the middle performance symbols, and the right performance symbols all form a symbol row in which the numbers are arranged in descending order from "9" to "1". Such symbol rows are displayed variably in a vertically flowing (scrolling) manner in the left area, middle area, and right area of the screen, respectively.

[Example of production in normal mode (non-time saving state)]
FIG. 47 is a continuous diagram showing an example of an effect image corresponding to a variable display and a static display of special symbols. In addition, here, regarding the fluctuation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (losing), an example of a variable display performance and a stop display performance (result display performance) performed using performance symbols is shown. This fluctuating display performance corresponds to a series of performances performed from when the first special symbol starts fluctuating display in normal mode (non-time reduction state) until it stops displaying (including fixed stop). . Further, the stop display performance is a performance that represents the stop display of the special symbol and the result of the internal lottery at that time as a combination of performance symbols. Here, first, before explaining the specific contents of the control processing, the basic flow of the variable display effect and stop display effect for each variation employed in this embodiment will be explained.

[Before fluctuation display]
(A) in FIG. 47: For example, in the state before the first special symbol starts to fluctuate (the state where the demonstration is not being performed), a row of three performance symbols is displayed in a large size on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. ing. At this time, in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the effect design is also in a state of being stopped and displayed.

[Memory display performance]
Further, in the pre-change display area X1 at the bottom of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, markers (indicated by reference symbols M1 and M2 in the figure) representing the number of working memories for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. ing. The display numbers of these markers M1 and M2 each represent the number of first special symbols and second special symbols in memory (the number of displays in the first special symbol memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol memory lamp 35a). The number of displayed items also increases or decreases in conjunction with changes in the number of working memories during the game.

Furthermore, in order to facilitate visual discrimination of the markers M1 and M2, the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the shape of a circle (○), for example, and the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the shape of a heart, for example. It is displayed in the shape of In the illustrated example, all four markers M1 are lit to indicate that the number of working memories for the first special symbol is four, and all markers M2 are hidden (indicated by broken lines). This indicates that the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 0 (memory display effect).

Further, while the performance symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, a fourth symbol (indicated by reference numerals Z1 and Z2 in the figure) is displayed, for example, at the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are "fourth performance symbols" that follow the left, middle, and right performance symbols, and are variably displayed in synchronization with the fluctuating display of the performance symbols. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are simply colored marks (for example, a "□" figure), and a variable display can be expressed by changing the display color, for example. The fourth symbol Z1 corresponds to the first special symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponds to the second special symbol.

Further, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the miss (eg, white display color). This is to objectively clarify that the stop display effect is being performed correctly and that the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is actually a "big hit" or "small win" instead of a "miss", the fourth symbols Z1, Z2 will be displayed in the corresponding manner (for example, red display color, green display color, etc.). is stopped and displayed.

[Fluctuating display performance starts]
(B) in FIG. 47: For example, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the three symbol rows scroll and fluctuate on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, thereby starting a fluctuating display performance (symbol performance means of execution). That is, in synchronization with the start of variation of the first special symbol, the columns of the left effect symbol, middle effect symbol, and right effect symbol are vertically scrolled (flowing) within the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and are displayed in a variable manner. The performance begins. Furthermore, before the start of the change, the markers M1 and M2 are displayed in the pre-change display area X1 of the band-shaped part in the lower part of the liquid crystal display 42, but after the start of the change, they are displayed in the lower left part of the liquid crystal display 42. The special symbol (performance symbol) is moved to the display area X2 during variation based on the pedestal image, and continues to be displayed until the variation of the special symbol (performance symbol) is stopped and displayed (memorized image display maintenance performance). In addition, in the figure, the fluctuating display of the performance symbols is simply indicated by a downward arrow. In addition, during variable display, individual performance symbols are displayed in a transparent state (transparent display), so that the image that is the background of the performance design (background image) is displayed on the display screen in a state that is easy to see. has been done.

The background image in this case is, for example, one that expresses the scenery of a park. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the presentation is, for example, "normal mode." In this embodiment, the "normal mode" is a low probability non-time reduction state (non-special game state). In addition to this, various modes are provided for the production, and each mode has a different background image with a different scenery or scene. The differences between these modes correspond to internal "time reduction states". Although not particularly shown here, a preview effect may be performed by, for example, displaying images of characters, items, etc. on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

Further, during the variable display of the performance symbols, the fourth symbol Z1 is displayed in a variable manner at the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 expresses the variable display by changing its display color.

[Left pattern stop]
(C) in FIG. 47: For example, after a certain amount of time (approximately half of the fluctuation time) has passed, the left effect symbol first stops fluctuating. This example shows that the effect pattern representing the number "8" has stopped on the left side of the screen. Note that illustration of the background image is omitted here (the same applies hereafter).

[Example of performance when the number of working memories decreases]
Here, as shown in FIG. 47 (B), the number of working memories of the first special symbol decreases by one with the start of variation, so the number of displayed markers M1 decreases accordingly. It has been decreased by one. For example, if there were 4 working memory numbers up to that point, the earliest (oldest) memory number display in marker M1 is moved by one to the changing display area X2, and the effects consumed by the internal lottery are combined. It will be done. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the number of working memories for the first special symbol has been consumed.

In the example of (C) in FIG. 47, the marker M1, which was at the beginning in the storage order, moves to the changing display area X2, leaving only 3 markers to be displayed in the pre-changing display area X1. An effect is performed in which the three markers M1 remaining on the screen are each shifted one direction (to the left in this case) by one marker. As a result, the context of changes in the number of working memories is accurately expressed in the performance, and the player is informed that ``the number of working memories has been consumed and the number has decreased by 1'' and that ``the number of working memories has been consumed and the special symbol It is possible to teach in an intuitive and easy-to-understand manner that "the current situation is changing."

[Right production pattern stop]
(D) in FIG. 47: Following the left presentation pattern, the right presentation pattern stops changing. This example shows that the effect pattern representing the number "3" has stopped at the middle position of the screen. At this point, it has already been determined that the reach state will not occur, so it is almost obvious visually that the current fluctuation is a non-reach (normal) fluctuation. Note that reach fluctuations due to slip patterns, etc. are excluded here. A "sliding pattern" is, for example, once the production symbol representing the number "7" stops, then the symbol row slides by one symbol and the production symbol representing the number "8" stops, which develops into a reach. The idea is to do so. Alternatively, there is also a pattern where the performance symbol representing the number "9" stops, and then the symbol row slides in the opposite direction by one symbol, and the performance symbol representing the number "8" stops, which develops into a reach. be. In addition, for example, after a production pattern that represents a completely different number such as "5" stops, a character appears on the screen and the right production pattern row changes again, and the number "8" is displayed. There is also a pattern where the production pattern stops and develops into a reach.

[Stop display effect]
(E) in FIG. 47: In synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol, the last medium effect symbol stops. If the result of this internal lottery is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (losing) manner, the performance symbol will also be stopped and displayed in a non-winning (losing) manner. be exposed. In other words, in the illustrated example, the effect symbol representing the number "1" has stopped at the middle position of the screen, and in this case, the effect symbol combination is "8" - "1" - "3". Because it is a deviation, the production is expressing that this change corresponds to a normal ``deviation.'' At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the miss (eg, white display color).

Further, when the stop display effect is performed, the marker M1 that has been moved to the changing display area X2 and continues to be displayed is also hidden. Therefore, it is possible to intuitively and easily instruct the player that ``the variation of the special symbols has ended''.

The above is an example of a variable display performance and a stop display performance (when not winning) that are performed using a performance symbol for each fluctuation. Through such a performance, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation for winning, and finally, the result of the internal lottery can be clearly taught in the performance.

Further, the above-mentioned example is for a non-winning time, but when a jackpot (win) is won, after the reach performance is executed during the variable display performance, the performance symbols are stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode in the stop display performance. At this time, the stop display mode of the performance symbols basically corresponds to the winning symbol internally selected by the main control CPU 72 (the stop display mode of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35). selected.

[Example of performance when winning the jackpot]
Next, an example of performance when winning a jackpot (winning) will be explained.
FIG. 48 is a continuous diagram showing the flow of the super reach effect executed during the variable display of special symbols. The super reach effect is a reach effect executed in conjunction with a variable display in which a medium variable time (for example, 50 to 100 seconds) is selected.

Here, we will explain the flow of the super reach effect that is executed at the time of a jackpot, but the super reach effect is executed not only at the time of a jackpot but also at a miss, although at a relatively low rate. Further, here, in addition to the reach effect, a variable display effect, a stop display effect, and a preview effect are included. In addition, an example of a preview performance (pre-ready notice performance before reach occurrence, notice performance after reach occurrence) executed during the variable display performance will be described.

In the following reach effect, for example, in the normal mode, after a variable display is performed on the first special symbol display device 34 according to a variable pattern at the time of a jackpot, the first special symbol is displayed in a jackpot mode (for example, "self" on a 7-segment LED). , "Yo", "Kuchi", "Snake", "F", "E", "L", "Γ", etc.) until the display is stopped (ready-to-reach effect execution means). In addition, in FIG. 48, each effect pattern is simplified and shown using only numbers. Further, the markers M1, M2, the fourth symbols Z1, Z2, the pre-fluctuation display area X1, and the fluctuating display area X2 are omitted from illustration (the same applies to the following drawings). The following will explain the flow of the performance.

[Fluctuating display performance]
(A) in FIG. 48: For example, approximately in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the rows of left performance symbols, middle performance symbols, and right performance symbols are displayed vertically (for example, from the top) on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The variable display performance starts by scrolling down).

[Pre-release preview performance (1st stage)]
(B) in FIG. 48: Next, at a relatively early stage of the variable display performance, a first-stage pre-ready-to-reach performance using a character image (picture card) is performed. This pre-ready-to-reach preview performance is a preview performance in which the appearance changes step by step from the first stage to a plurality of stages (for example, stages 2 to 5) according to a predetermined order. The symbol image used in this pre-reach warning performance is located in front of the performance symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner on the screen, and is displayed, for example, by appearing suddenly from the left edge of the screen (other modes of appearance) ). It should be noted that the "notice before the occurrence of a reach" here means that the possibility of a reach or the possibility of a jackpot is foretold before any of the performance symbols are stopped and displayed. By executing such a "pre-reach event preview performance", it is possible to create a feeling of expectation in the player that "it may develop into a reach event = the possibility of winning the jackpot will increase."

[Pre-release preview performance (2nd stage)]
(C) in FIG. 48: After the first stage of the ready-to-reach pre-warning performance is executed, the change in the form of the ready-to-reach pre-warning performance proceeds to the second stage. Here, as a preview performance before the occurrence of the second stage of reaching, a performance using a different character image from the previous stage is performed. Specifically, another pattern image additionally appears from the right end of the screen and is displayed overlappingly in front of the previously displayed pattern image. Further, the pattern image displayed at this time is larger in size than the previously displayed pattern image. In addition, a sound output effect is also performed in which the character represented by the picture image utters a line (for example, ``I'll become a reach'', etc.).

The pre-reach event preview performance (second stage) using such a second pattern image is a step further from the pre-reach event preview performance (first stage) shown in (B) in Figure 48 above. It is a developed type. The aspect of the "pre-reach advance notice performance" that develops in this way is generally referred to as "step-up notice" or the like. Here, an example is given in which the second-stage pattern image appears in the pre-reach warning effect, but the third, fourth, and fifth-level pattern images may appear one after another and be displayed. There may be. Further, for example, the size may be enlarged each time the pattern images of the third, fourth, and fifth stages appear and are displayed one after another. Incidentally, even at this stage, the fluctuating display of the performance symbols continues. In any case, by advancing the change in the form of the pre-reach warning performance to more stages, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility (expectation level) of hitting the jackpot with this change. (For example, progression to stage 5 indicates the highest level of expectation.)

[Stopping of the left production pattern]
(D) in FIG. 48: The middle stage of the variable display effect is reached, and the variable display of the left effect symbol is eventually stopped. Incidentally, at this point, the effect pattern representing the number "5" has stopped on the left side of the screen.

[Occurrence of reach state]
(E) in FIG. 48: Following the left presentation pattern, for example, the variable display of the right presentation pattern is stopped. At this point, since the performance symbol representing the number "5" has stopped on the right side of the screen, a reach state of "5" - "Fluctuating" - "5" has occurred. An image highlighting one line that is in a reach state is also displayed on the screen. In addition, a performance that outputs sounds such as "Reach!" will be performed.

After the reach state occurs, the reach effect at the time of winning is executed (however, at this point, the winning result has not yet been displayed). In the reach effect, only the effect pattern corresponding to the highest number (here, "5") is displayed on the screen, and the rest are not displayed. Note that, at this time, the performance symbols may be displayed in a reduced form at each of the four corners of the screen.

[Preview performance after reach occurrence (1st time)]
(F) in Figure 48: After a while after the reach state occurs, a preview effect (first time) is performed after the reach state occurs, in which images representing, for example, a "heart" shape form a group and pass diagonally across the screen. . In this case, images of "hearts" are suddenly displayed on the screen in a flowing manner, thereby increasing the visual appeal to the player. By executing such a visually lively notice performance after the occurrence of a reach notice, it is possible to obtain an effect of creating even greater expectations in the player.

[Progress of reach performance]
Figure 48 (G): After the first reach occurrence, following the preview effect, images representing the numbers “2” to “6” are displayed in a three-dimensional row on the screen, and the row An effect is performed in which number images are erased from the screen in the order of ``2'', ``3'', ``4'', etc. starting from the beginning (front). Such an effect is also performed for the purpose of suggesting or reminding the player that if the number "5" remains without being erased until the end, it will be a "jackpot". Also, if the number "4" is erased and "5" remains in front of the screen, it means a "jackpot", and if the number "5" is also erased, it means a "miss". In addition, in the case of a miss, the number "6", for example, is displayed on the screen after the number "5" is erased. Therefore, during this time, as the images of numbers "2", "3", and "4" are erased in order, the player's sense of tension and anticipation increases. When the number ``4'' is actually erased on the screen and the production progresses with the number ``5'' remaining on the screen, the possibility of a ``jackpot'' increases, which increases the tension of the player. It also increases rapidly.

[Preview performance after reach occurs (2nd time)]
Figure 48 middle (H): As the reach performance approaches the end, a character image suddenly appears on the screen, cutting into a close-up shot, and the character is uttering some kind of dialogue (or silently). A preview performance (second time) will be performed after reaching the target (which may include smiling). At this point, for example, the content of the reach effect is, ``If the number ``5'' remains without being erased, the possibility of a jackpot of ``5'' - ``5'' - ``5''increases.'' Therefore, by making a large character image appear at this timing, it is possible to have the effect of making the player feel hopeful that he or she might hit the jackpot.

Another reach effect other than the above is, for example, ``If the numbers ``2'' to ``4'' are erased, and the number ``5'' remains at the end without being erased, it will be a jackpot.'' Appearing the character image at such timing has the effect of making the player feel hopeful that he or she may finally hit the jackpot soon.

[Stop display effect]
(I) in FIG. 48: Then, the last medium effect symbol stops. In this example, it is possible to notify the player that he has won the jackpot by stopping and displaying the performance symbol representing "5" in the center of the screen.

(J) in FIG. 48: Then, for example, in approximately synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol, a stop display performance as a performance symbol is performed. The stop display performance of the performance symbols is performed, for example, with the left, middle, and right performance symbols restored to their initial sizes. By performing such a stop display performance, it is possible to inform the player that the final winning type has been determined in the performance. In other words, by performing an unclear stop display performance in the performance, it is possible to keep it hidden from the player which winning symbol won the prize.

Note that if the result of the internal lottery is non-winning, the first special symbol which is the subject of variation this time is stopped and displayed as a losing symbol, and therefore the performance symbol is similarly stopped and displayed in a losing manner. In this case, numbers other than ``5'' such as ``4'' and ``6'' are displayed in the center of the screen to indicate that unfortunately, this fluctuation did not result in a jackpot. Note that such a performance is executed as a "missing reach performance."

[Major role production]
FIGS. 49 to 52 are continuous diagrams partially showing examples of the big win effect executed during the jackpot game. It should be noted that the following big role effects are effects executed on the liquid crystal display 42.

[Jackpot game starts]
(A) in FIG. 49: When the jackpot game starts, for example, text information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed on the screen, and a unique performance image (for example, a female character) is displayed during the jackpot game. .

[Daiyaku “right-handed” display (information display means)]
In addition, in this embodiment, since the first variable winning device 30 is arranged on the right side of the game area 8a, the right side of the game area 8a is designated as the launch position (launch direction) of the game ball during the big win. It is said that Therefore, under the control of the main control CPU 72, the above-mentioned firing position designation display lamp 38f is lit and displayed, and a firing position designation command indicating "right-handed hitting" is transmitted to the production control device 124. In response to this, guidance information (an arrow indicating the right direction, the words "hit right", etc.) that urges "hit right" is displayed on the display screen under the performance control by the performance control CPU 126.

[1st round]
(B) in FIG. 49: When the first round of the jackpot game starts, for example, five O marks are displayed along with the character information "BIG BONUS" in the upper left part of the screen. The leftmost circle mark is displayed in red, and the remaining four circle marks are displayed in white. As a result, you can see that there are 5 rounds in which you can get a ball, that the current round is the first round of those 5 rounds, and that a circle mark will appear for each round in which you can get a ball. It is possible to teach the player that the information will be displayed in red.

Here, the number of "○ marks" increases according to the winning symbols. For example, if the winning symbol is the "first winning symbol" or "second winning symbol", the number of "○ marks" is "5", but if the winning symbol is the "fifth winning symbol" In this case, the number of "○ marks" is "15".

[5th round]
(C) in FIG. 49: After this, the jackpot game progresses smoothly and, for example, when the game moves to the fifth round, all five O marks are displayed in red. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that all rounds in which balls can be won will end at this fifth round.

[During a round with no balls put out]
(D) in FIG. 49: Then, when the round (fifth round) in which balls can be obtained ends, a round in which no balls can be played is started. When the no-balls-out round starts, for example, a no-balls-out round effect is executed in which text information such as "Stadium Mode Challenge" is displayed on the screen. By this performance during the round with no balls put out, it is possible to inform the player whether or not to shift to the stadium mode after the current jackpot game.

(E) in Figure 50: Then, as the production progresses during the round with no balls, text information such as ``If you hit the button repeatedly to make the heart object fall, enter stadium mode!'' will be displayed on the screen. The performance is executed. Thereby, it is possible to tell the player whether to enter the stadium mode or not depending on whether or not the movable body 40f falls.

[Button press effect]
(F) in FIG. 50: For example, an image imitating the effect switching button 45 is displayed in the front on the screen, and above the effect switching button 45 text information such as "Continuous Hit!!" is displayed. Thereby, the player can be encouraged to repeatedly press the performance switching button 45. Further, when the player presses the performance switching button 45, the performance switching button 45 is displayed to show that it has been pressed.

[Successful button press production]
(G) in FIG. 50: If the winning symbol at the time of the jackpot is a winning symbol that shifts to the stadium mode (for example, if it corresponds to the "second winning symbol"), the player presses the production switching button 45. By repeatedly hitting , a button press success effect of dropping the movable body 40f to the front side of the liquid crystal display 42 is executed. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that he or she has succeeded in the game by repeatedly hitting the effect switching button 45.

(H) in FIG. 50: A female character also appears, and text information such as "Great success! Congratulations" is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player to enter the "stadium mode".

[Time reduction state entry production]
(I) in FIG. 51: Then, using the end time (ending time) of the jackpot game, an effect is executed in which character information such as "Enter stadium mode!" is displayed. This allows the player to be informed that the "stadium mode" is about to start. In addition, text information such as ``Keep hitting right'' is displayed along with an arrow indicating the right direction, and the player can be taught that the game progresses by hitting right even in the ``stadium mode.''

[Jackpot game ended, time shortened state]
(J) in Figure 51: When the jackpot game ends and the internal state (game state) is set to the time shortening state, the stay mode is set to "stadium mode" and the background image changes to the car in which the woman was riding. The image will be changed to one that depicts driving on the ground. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that the current internal state (gaming state) is a time reduction state different from the normal state.

[Information display]
In addition, during the "stadium mode" (time reduction state), by firing the game ball into the right side area of the game area 8a, the game ball can efficiently pass through the starting gate 20, and the winning can be won by drawing a lottery corresponding to the normal symbol. This allows the variable start winning device 28 to be opened for a long time. Thereby, during the "stadium mode", it is possible to generate lottery opportunities corresponding to the second special symbol with high frequency. For this reason, in this embodiment, during the "stadium mode", information about "right-handed hitting" is constantly displayed on the display screen, and the player is informed that "this is a game state in which it is advantageous (necessary) to play right-handed." (information display means). The information is displayed in a band area B at the upper edge of the screen by displaying an animation of the words "Right-handed" and a right-pointing arrow flowing to the right.

[Button press failure production]
(K) in Figure 52: On the other hand, if the winning symbol at the time of the jackpot is not a winning symbol that shifts to stadium mode (for example, if it corresponds to the "first winning symbol"), (F) in Figure 50 After the button-pressing effect, a female character appears and text information such as ``Too bad. Next time, do your best!'' is displayed. This makes it possible to teach the player that the game will not enter the "stadium mode."

[Jackpot game ended, normal state]
(L) in Figure 52: Then, when the jackpot game ends and the internal state (game state) is set to the normal state, the stay mode is set to "normal mode" and the background image is changed to an image representing a park. be done. This makes it possible to teach the player that the current internal state (gaming state) is a normal state that is different from the time reduction state. Additionally, a female character appears and utters lines such as ``Please go back to hitting left-handed.'' This makes it possible to teach the player that the game will proceed with the player returning to left-handed batting. Therefore, in this case, information about "right-handed hitting" is not displayed.

[Example of stadium mode (time reduction state)]
FIGS. 53 to 58 are continuous diagrams showing examples of performances in stadium mode (time reduction state). In the stadium mode, after shifting to this state, there is one fluctuation that starts when the game ball first enters the right starting prize opening 28b, and during the fluctuation display, the game ball enters the right starting winning hole 28b. A baseball-themed production is performed using a set of up to three working memories (time saving 1 variation of the second special symbol + up to three working memories) charged by the ball hitting the ball. The following will explain the flow of the performance.

[First special symbol fluctuation starts]
(A) in FIG. 53: Immediately after shifting to the stadium mode, the background image is changed to an image depicting a car in which a woman is riding driving on the ground. In the stadium mode, the above-mentioned "right-handed batting" information is displayed in band area B within the screen. Also, at this time, an image of a character wearing a cap is displayed at the bottom left of the screen, along with the character's line, ``I'm going to hit right!''. In addition to the display in the band area B, by outputting/displaying a line instructing to hit to the right, it is advantageous (necessary) to hit to the right and, by extension, to enter the game ball into the right starting prize opening 28b. It is possible to remind players that this is the case.

At the time of the first hit with the first special symbol, the working memory of the first special symbol is often stored, and the working memory of the second special symbol is generally not stored. In the illustrated example, four working memories (markers M1) of the first special symbol are stored. Therefore, when entering the stadium mode in such a situation, first the first special symbol starts to change. In addition, in the stadium mode, when the player executes a right-handed hit, the game ball passes through the starting gate 20, and if a winning is obtained in the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol, the variable starting winning device 28 is activated after the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. Since the right starting winning hole 28b is opened for a long time (opening for 0.9 seconds), the ball enters the right starting winning hole 28b easily while it is open, and the second special symbol changes after the ball enters. Priority will be given to change.

In addition, when the working memory of the first special symbol is not stored, when the working memory corresponding to the second special symbol is generated by the ball entering the right starting winning hole 28b, the working memory is consumed and the second special symbol is stored. The first variation of the symbol is executed. Then, when the first special symbol starts to fluctuate like this time, the reduced version of the performance symbol and the fourth symbol Z1 displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 also start to fluctuate. .

In this embodiment, the variation time of the first special symbol in the stadium mode is set to a short time, and the symbol stops without any special performance that makes it stand out on the screen. Here, the internal lottery regarding the first special symbol falls out three times in a row, a plurality of game balls pass through the starting gate 20 within the three fluctuation times, and the variable starting prize is won during the third fluctuation. It is assumed that the device 28 is opened and one game ball enters the right starting prize opening 28b.

[End of 1st special symbol variation]
(B) in FIG. 53: When the first special symbol stops in a missed state, the reduced version of the performance symbol displayed on the upper left of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 appears in a missed state (for example, "8" - "3" - "3") is stopped and displayed, and the fourth symbol Z1 at the lower right of the screen is also stopped and displayed in a different manner (for example, white display color). Since the first special symbol has changed three times so far, the number of markers M1 has decreased by three since the transition to the stadium mode, and only one remains.

[Origin of the first working memory]
In addition, as one game ball enters the right start prize opening 28b, a baseball ball representing the operating memory of the pedestal image and the second special symbol is displayed in the fluctuating display area X2 at the lower left part of the screen. Marker M2 is displayed. The marker M2 displayed in the changing display area X2 corresponds to the first working memory stored after shifting to the stadium mode.

[Start of second special symbol fluctuation, start of first part production]
(C) in FIG. 53: The second special symbol starts to fluctuate, and approximately in synchronization with this, the variable display of the reduced version of the performance symbol and the fourth symbol Z2 begins. Furthermore, the marker M2 in the display area X2 during fluctuation is displayed in a glittering manner surrounded by a veil of light from beginning to end during the fluctuation. Such a display can make the player aware that the current change has some special meaning. In addition, when the fluctuation starts, as part of the effect that is performed in the first part of the change time (hereinafter referred to as the "previous part effect"), an image of a cheerleader with a megaphone is displayed in the center of the screen. At the same time, the lines uttered by the cheerleader are displayed: ``Save up more and more reservations!'' This makes it possible to disclose to the player that the current period is for charging the working memory.

[Change of background image]
Figure 53 (D): The background image on the screen changes completely from what was displayed just before the instruction to charge the working memory (a car driving on the ground), and an image showing the stadium in the distance is displayed. be done. Such a change allows the player to recognize that the scene has changed significantly.

[Increase in working memory]
(E) in FIG. 54: At this timing, one game ball enters the right start prize opening 28b, and the leftmost marker among the markers M2 in the pre-change display area X1 is displayed. Also, at this time, an image showing a shooting star gently passing by is displayed. Such a display can give the player a hunch that some kind of favorable development awaits him.

[Stopping of the left production pattern]
(F) in FIG. 54: Among the reduced version performance symbols, the left performance symbol representing the number "3" is stopped and displayed. At this time, a little time had passed since the start of the fluctuation, and as part of the first stage production, the words ``The venue is filled with excitement'' uttered by the live reporter were output from the speakers and displayed on the screen. The character will be displayed. By performing such effects, we are trying to keep players from getting bored while recharging their working memory.

[Increase in working memory]
(G) in FIG. 54: At this timing, two game balls enter the right starting prize opening 28b in succession, and the second and third markers from the left of the markers M2 in the pre-variation display area X1 are displayed. Ru. As a result, the number of second special symbols in the working memory becomes three in total, which has reached the maximum number, so the words "MAX!!" are displayed in band area B on the screen to indicate this. Also, as part of the first stage production, the commentator's line ``We've been blessed with nice weather today'' is output from the speakers, and the words are displayed on the screen.

[Selection of baseball game type]
(H) in FIG. 54: The entire screen of the liquid crystal display 42 is switched and divided into two areas, and each area displays the words "4-ball game" and "one-hit spirit", and An image imitating the effect switching button 45 is displayed in the center on the front side. Here, ``four-ball game'' refers to a baseball game that consists of competing to see how many home runs you can hit in four chances, and ``one-hit spirit'' refers to winning or losing in a one-shot game. It is a baseball game whose contents are decided by the players. Therefore, such a display allows the player to recognize that it is possible to determine which baseball game to play by operating the effect switching button 45.

In the illustrated state, the upper left area where the words "4-ball game" are displayed is highlighted, but when the jog dial provided around the effect switching button 45 is rotated, The area at the bottom right where the words ``Place your soul'' are displayed is highlighted. On the two-choice screen configured in this manner, the player moves the highlight to one of the baseball games by rotating the jog dial, and then presses and operates the production switching button 45 to select the highlight. You can select the baseball game displayed in the displayed area. If the production switching button 45 is not operated within the valid time, one of the baseball games is automatically selected by internal processing.

Note that although we are using the rotation operation of the jog dial as an example here, the words ``Four Ball Game'' and ``One Hit Spirit'' will alternately be highlighted on the screen even if there is no particular operation by the player. It may be a mode in which a display prompting the push of the performance switching button 45 is displayed while repeating the above, and one of the baseball games is selected at the timing when the performance switching button 45 is actually pressed (after the valid time has elapsed).

[Baseball game (4-ball game) selection]
Figure 55 (I): The entire screen changes further, and the title text "4-ball game" is displayed in large letters at the top of the screen, and below it is a "button" that simply represents a 4-ball game. Aim for a home run with PUSH!'' is displayed. This display allows the player to confirm that a four-ball baseball game has been selected, and also allows the player to be notified in advance of the general content of the game.

[Stop of right direction design, start of second stage direction]
(J) in FIG. 55: Among the reduced version performance symbols, the right performance symbol representing the number "3" is stopped and displayed. As a result, the production pattern becomes a ready-to-reach state of "3" - "Fluctuating" - "3". Along with this, a ready-to-win performance (hereinafter referred to as "second part performance") that is executed in the latter part of the variable time is started. As the starting screen for the latter half of the production, the title text ``Play Ball!'' (any other expression is acceptable) is displayed in large letters in the center of the screen, and two cheerleaders cheer by waving pom-poms with smiles on their faces. An image showing what it looks like will be displayed.

In addition, since the number of working memories of the second special symbol has reached the maximum number, the band area B that was displayed at the top of the screen during the execution of the first stage effect disappears, and in its place, a small right-hitting display is displayed at the top right of the screen. Ru. If the player continues to hit the ball to the right after this, the ball will easily enter the right starting winning hole 28b, but the working memory of the second special symbol will not increase any further (more than 3 symbols may be accumulated) (No)

[Start of baseball game (4-ball game)]
(K) in FIG. 55: A four-pitch baseball game is started, four players are displayed on the screen, and "first pitch" is displayed at the top of the screen. At this time, an arrow is pointing toward the player on the far left, indicating that he is the next batter, and this player is holding the bat while adjusting the angle of his helmet.

[Baseball game progress]
(L) in FIG. 55: An image showing a pitcher throwing a ball is displayed in the center of the screen. In conjunction with this, the line ``The pitcher threw!'' uttered by the live reporter is output from the speaker, and the words are displayed on the screen.

(M) in FIG. 56: An image showing the ball thrown on the previous screen approaching in slow motion is displayed, and an image imitating the effect switching button 45 is displayed in the center of the front side. Is displayed. This display allows the player to recognize that the bat will be swung (a home run challenge will be performed) by pressing the effect switching button 45.

(N1), (O1) in FIG. 56: If the home run challenge is successful, a movable body effect in which the movable body 40f is dropped in front of the liquid crystal display 42 is executed. Then, an image showing the batter in a Banzai pose with a big smile on his face is displayed, and the words ``Great job! Home run!!'' uttered by the live reporter are output from the speaker and displayed on the screen. The character will be displayed. These effects can make the player realize that he has hit a home run.

In Figure 56 (N2), (O2): On the other hand, when the home run challenge fails, an image showing how the ball is placed in the catcher's mitt is displayed, followed by a frustrated look of the batter who missed the shot. An image representing the will be displayed. In conjunction with this, the words ``Strike, batter out'' uttered by the live reporter are output from the speakers, and the words are displayed on the screen. These effects can make the player realize that he did not hit a home run.

(P) in FIG. 56: Then, the words "Home run chance/3 more pitches" are displayed in large letters in the center of the screen. This display allows the player to recognize that he has three more chances to hit a home run.

(Q) in FIG. 57: Four players are displayed on the screen again, and "2nd pitch" is displayed at the top of the screen. Here, the arrow indicating the next batter is directed to the second player from the left.

The image shown is the one that is displayed when the first home run challenge is successful (after going through the effects shown in (N1) and (O1) in Figure 56), and is the image that is displayed when the first home run challenge is successful (after going through the effects shown in (N1) and (O1) in Figure 56). The player is shown making the V sign. If the first home run challenge fails (after going through the effects shown in (N2) and (O2) in Figure 56), instead of this image, the player on the far left who was unable to hit a home run will be disappointed. An image showing how it will be displayed will be displayed.

Thereafter, the effects shown in (L) in FIG. 55 to (Q) in FIG. 57 are repeated, and when all four home run challenges are completed, the results of the four-ball contest are announced. Here, an example will be described in which the player succeeds in the home run challenge two out of four times (he was able to hit two home runs).

[End of baseball game]
Figure 57 middle (R): The entire screen changes, and the words "Final Result" are displayed in large letters in the center of the screen, and below that, the number "1000" gradually approaches from the back side. At the same time, an image is displayed showing the number "2000" gradually approaching from further back. In addition, the right-click display of the reduced version that had been displayed continuously at the top right of the screen will be deleted.

[Stop of the middle stage design, end of the second stage stage]
(S) in FIG. 57: A medium effect pattern representing the number "3" is stopped and displayed. As a result, the performance symbols are stopped and displayed in a set of three "3"-"3"-"3". This aspect corresponds to, for example, a small winning symbol. At this time, the fourth symbol Z2 is also stopped and displayed in a manner (eg, red display color) corresponding to this small hit. By stopping and displaying the performance symbols and the fourth symbol Z2 in this manner, it is possible to disclose to the player that any of the winnings has been determined. After this, a small winning game is executed.

At this time, the number gradually approaching from the back of the screen finally becomes ``2000,'' and the large letters ``TOTAL/2000PT'' are displayed in a glittering manner on the screen. By this display, it is possible to inform the player that the total number of balls that can be obtained in the small winning game to be executed after this and furthermore in the jackpot game that can be executed as a result is 2000.

[Start of small winning game]
(T1) in FIG. 58: As the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small winning mode, a small winning game is started, and the second variable winning device 31 shifts to the open state (second big winning opening 31b is opened). Then, the car in which the female character is riding increases speed and moves toward the right side of the screen, and the Sennin character utters the line, ``Aim for the attacker in the bottom right.'' Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that he or she must enter the game ball into the second variable winning device 31. Note that during the small winning game, the fourth symbol Z2 at the bottom right of the screen continues to be stopped and displayed in a small winning mode. In addition, since the second variable winning device 31 for entering the game ball is arranged in the right-hand hitting area, a reduced version of the right-hand hitting is displayed again at the upper right of the screen.

[Passage through specific area]
In FIG. 58 (T2): The second variable winning device 31 shifts to the open state due to the small winning game, during which the game ball passes through the specific area 31x, and the winning symbol at the time of the small winning is the 6th winning symbol. shall be taken as a thing. In this example, a female character riding in a car holds up a heart mark with a letter V drawn on it and utters lines such as "You did it! BIG BONUS!!". Thereby, it is possible to inform the player that the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x and that a jackpot game (BIG BONUS) is about to start.

[Small win game ends, jackpot game starts]
(U) in FIG. 58: After that, the small winning game ends and the second variable winning device 31 shifts to the closed state (the second big winning opening 31b is closed). Further, the jackpot game is started when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small win game. In this example, a female character unique to jackpot games appears, character information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed, and an effect is executed in which the female character utters similar lines. On the display screen, text information such as ``Keep hitting right'' is displayed along with an arrow pointing to the right, and the player can be taught that the jackpot game will proceed by hitting right. In addition, the right-click display of the reduced version at the top right of the screen continues to be performed.

Thereafter, the process advances to (B) in FIG. 49, where the performance during the jackpot game similar to that described above is started, and the jackpot game progresses. In other words, in this case, since it corresponds to the winning symbol at the time of the small hit regarding the second special symbol (6th winning symbol), it is possible to obtain the balls for 15 rounds in effect, and the winning symbol for the 15 rounds. After acquiring a ball, it internally switches to normal mode. Here, even after switching to normal mode, stadium mode will continue until the working memory charged while staying in stadium mode (more precisely, within the variable time of the second special symbol) is exhausted. A performance is performed as an extension of the performance (baseball game) performed within the variable time of the second special symbol. In the previous example, the production announced that two home runs were hit in a four-pitch baseball game, so in response to the "two home runs," there would be a total of two jackpot games via small wins. It will be held twice. Therefore, one more jackpot game via the small win game will be performed after this.

[Transition to normal mode]
(V) in Figure 58: When the jackpot game ends, the reduced version of the effect pattern is displayed again at the top left of the screen, the stop display (small win mode) in the previous variation is reproduced, and the number at the bottom right of the screen is reproduced. The 4th symbol Z2 is also stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to this small hit.

At this time, the state has transitioned from stadium mode to normal mode, but since 3 working memories of the second special symbol remain, the background image of the stadium is displayed on the screen during these 3 fluctuation times. is displayed, and an extension of the baseball game executed during the previous change is executed.

[Stopping the production pattern (1st time)]
(W) in Figure 59: The second special symbol stops immediately after starting to fluctuate, and the reduced version of the production symbol displayed at the top left of the screen is out of place (for example, "5" - "3" - "7") ) is stopped and displayed, and the fourth symbol Z2 at the lower right of the screen is also stopped and displayed in a different manner (eg, white display color). Since the second special symbol has changed once, the number of markers M2 has decreased by one, leaving two markers remaining. Note that since the variation time of the second special symbol is set to an extremely short time (for example, 0.5 seconds), no noticeable change occurs on the screen.

[Stopping the production pattern (second time)]
(X) in Figure 59: The second special symbol stops immediately after starting to fluctuate again, and the reduced version of the performance symbol displayed at the top left of the screen is out of place (for example, "4" - "6" - "8""), and the fourth symbol Z2 at the bottom right of the screen is also stopped and displayed in a different manner (eg, white display color). Since the second special symbol has changed once, the number of markers M2 has decreased by one, leaving only one marker. Similarly here, no noticeable changes occur on the screen, and the symbols change and stop in an extremely short period of time.

[Stopping the production pattern (3rd time)]
(Y) in Figure 59: Immediately after the second special symbol starts to fluctuate again, it stops, and the reduced version of the performance symbol displayed at the top left of the screen is now in the form of a small hit (for example, "3" - "3"-"3"), and the fourth symbol Z2 at the bottom right of the screen is also stopped and displayed in a small win mode (for example, red display color). In addition, in conjunction with this, a movable body effect in which the movable body 40f is dropped in front of the liquid crystal display 42 is executed. This presentation allows the player to instantly recognize that he or she has won. Since the second special symbol has changed once, the marker M2 has completely disappeared. After this, a second small winning game is executed.

(Z) in FIG. 59: As the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small winning mode, a small winning game is started, and the second variable winning device 31 shifts to the open state (the second big winning opening 31b is opened). Then, the car in which the female character is riding increases speed and moves toward the right side of the screen, and the Sennin character utters the line, ``Aim for the attacker in the bottom right.''

After that, the small winning game is executed according to the production example after (T1) in FIG. 58, and if the game ball passes the specific area 31x during the small winning game, the jackpot game is executed after the small winning game ends. executed. At this point, the working memory of the second special symbol is all consumed, so after the end of the jackpot game (if the game ball did not pass the specific area 31x during the small win game, after the end of the small win game) ), the first special symbol changes. During this variable time, a background image representing a park is displayed on the screen, and an effect different from that of the baseball game executed during the variable time of the second special symbol is performed from the stay in the stadium mode to after the transition to the normal mode.

As described above, when "4-ball game" is selected on the two-option screen shown in FIG. , a baseball game in which players challenge themselves to get a home run in the fourth inning. On the other hand, if "one hit, soul" is selected on the two-option screen, a baseball game production of one hit, the soul, is executed as the latter part, and with two outs and the bases loaded in the bottom of the 9th inning, A baseball game is unfolding where the bet is on the bat. Hereinafter, an example of the second part performance that is executed when "one-hit soul" is selected will be explained.

[Baseball game (one hit soul) selection]
(I) in Figure 60: When “One-hit soul” is selected on the two-choice screen shown in (H) in Figure 54, after the entire screen is switched, a large “ The title text ``Hit the ball'' is displayed, and below it is displayed the phrase ``A heart-pounding one-button game!'' which clearly expresses the baseball game of ``One hit soul''. This display makes it possible for the player to confirm that the one-hit baseball game has been selected, and also to notify the general content of the game in advance.

[Stop of right direction design, start of second stage direction]
(J) in FIG. 60: Among the reduced version performance symbols, the right performance symbol representing the number "3" is stopped and displayed. As a result, the production pattern becomes a ready-to-reach state of "3" - "Fluctuating" - "3". Along with this, the second stage performance is started. As the starting screen for the second part, a large title text reading ``One-shot chance to turn the tables!'' is displayed in the center of the screen, along with two cheerleaders cheering with smiles on their faces and waving pom-poms. The displayed image will be displayed.

[Start of baseball game (one hit soul)]
(K) in FIG. 60: The words "9th inning back/5 vs. 6" are displayed in large letters in the center of the screen, and the baseball game begins. Further, at the bottom right of the screen, the current progress of the baseball game is displayed in a simplified manner. As can be seen from this simple display, the baseball game starts in the bottom of the 9th inning with two outs, bases loaded, and the team of the ally (player) losing by one point. By starting the game from behind, it is possible to make the player feel that ``I don't want to lose this way'' and to motivate him to play the game.

[Baseball game progress]
(L) in FIG. 60: An image showing a pitcher throwing a ball is displayed in the center of the screen. In conjunction with this, the line ``The pitcher threw!'' uttered by the live reporter is output from the speaker, and the words are displayed on the screen.

(M) in FIG. 61: An image showing the ball thrown on the previous screen approaching in slow motion is displayed, and an image imitating the effect switching button 45 is displayed in the center of the front side. Is displayed. This display allows the player to recognize that the bat will be swung only once by pressing the effect switching button 45.

(N) in FIG. 61: An image showing a bat swung by a batter approaching a ball is displayed in the center of the screen. In addition, in conjunction with this, the words ``So, what do you think?!'' uttered by the live reporter are output from the speaker, and the words are displayed on the screen.

(O) in FIG. 61: A movable body effect in which the movable body 40f is dropped in front of the liquid crystal display 42 is executed. This effect allows the player to recognize that the batting was successful (hit successfully).

(P) in FIG. 61: Due to the hit in the previous scene, an image showing the two players who were on base stepping on home plate is displayed in the center of the screen. Also, at this time, the words ``Two runners have returned! Goodbye to the comeback!!'' uttered excitedly by the live reporter are output from the speakers, and the words are displayed on the screen. In the illustrated example, 2 points are scored for a hit, but scoring patterns range from "0 points" to "4 points", and the pattern is applied depending on the situation. For example, if the batting in the previous scene results in a home run with the bases loaded, four points will be scored and a corresponding performance will be executed.

(Q) in Figure 62: The score is updated because two points were scored in the previous scene, and the words "Game over/Win 7-6!!" are displayed in large letters in the center of the screen, and the entire screen is A flashy production image is displayed. Then, in the bottom of the 9th inning, the friendly team reversed the game, so the friendly team had already won a walk-off victory. From this, it is possible to convince the player that ``I must have won'' and give him a certain sense of accomplishment and satisfaction.

[End of baseball game]
(R) in Figure 62: The entire screen changes, and the words "Final Result" are displayed in large letters in the center of the screen, and below that, the number "1000" gradually approaches from the back. At the same time, an image is displayed showing the number "2000" gradually approaching from further back. In addition, the right-click display of the reduced version that has been displayed continuously at the top right of the screen will be deleted.

[Stop of the middle stage design, end of the second stage stage]
(S) in FIG. 62: A medium effect pattern representing the number "3" is stopped and displayed. As a result, the performance symbols are stopped and displayed in a set of three "3"-"3"-"3". This aspect corresponds to, for example, a small winning symbol. At this time, the fourth symbol Z2 is also stopped and displayed in a manner (eg, red display color) corresponding to this small hit.

At this time, the number gradually approaching from the back of the screen finally becomes ``2000,'' and the large letters ``TOTAL/2000PT'' are displayed in a glittering manner on the screen. By this display, it is possible to inform the player that the total number of balls that can be obtained in the small winning game to be executed after this and furthermore in the jackpot game that can be executed as a result is 2000.

Then, following this, a small winning game is executed according to the performance example after (T1) in FIG. 58, and if the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small winning game, the small winning game ends. Afterwards, a jackpot game is executed. In addition, in this example, the production announces that 2 points were scored during the attack in the bottom of the 9th inning in a baseball game where one hit is a spirit, so in response to ``2 points'', a jackpot game via a small hit is played. will be held twice in total.

In addition, as mentioned above, the baseball game where you put your heart and soul into one hit has the game nature of betting on the last hit, so even if the score is tied and the last hit is an out, the baseball game will not end. The game ends as is (this is just an example and may be configured with different content).

In the manner described above, the performance in the stadium mode is executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, first, the player is made to charge the working memory of the second special symbol during the execution of the first part performance that is executed in the first part of the variation time of the second special symbol in the stadium mode. The execution period of the first stage performance can also be referred to as the "working memory charging period", and if the player hits the game ball in the generally expected manner according to the instructions for hitting right, the working memory will be charged to the maximum number of balls. The period is set to a length (for example, 20 seconds) that is considered to be possible. The content of the first stage performance is determined by a lottery based on the winning and losing results of the fluctuation, which is performed before the fluctuation of the fluctuation starts. In addition to the above-mentioned performance, in the process of the front stage performance, a performance may be performed in which the display mode of the marker M2 is changed according to the result of pre-reading.

In addition, in the latter stage performance executed in the latter part of the variable time, a baseball game selected by the player is played out. The contents of the baseball game (second part production) are tentatively determined by a lottery that is carried out based on the winning and losing results of the variation before the start of the variation, and then the changes and the operation are decided before the start of the second part production. The final decision is made by a lottery performed based on the winning/losing results (the number of winning items) of the working memories charged in the memory charging period. Note that a specific method of controlling the latter stage performance will be described in detail later with reference to other drawings.

Next, an example of a control method for specifically realizing the above effects (including various displays and disclosures) will be explained. The above-mentioned variable display performance, reach performance, advance notice performance before reach occurrence, memorized number display performance, big win performance, and other performances using the liquid crystal display 42 are all controlled through the following control process.

[Production control processing]
As mentioned above, the production control device 124 has the functions of a production control processor and a production reproduction processor, and achieves these two functions by allocating different resources of the production control CPU 126 to each. . The performance control CPU 126 as a performance control processor receives the performance command transmitted from the main control device 70, and sets various control tables for instructing reproduction of the performance according to the content. In addition, the performance control CPU 126 as a performance playback processor analyzes the control table set by the performance control processor, and issues more specific instructions to each device based on the contents of the control table, so that the operation of each device (liquid crystal display screen display by the device 42, audio output by the speakers 54, 55, 56, light emission by various lamps 46 to 52 and board lamp 53, etc., displacement of various movable bodies by the movable body motor 57, etc.). Realize performance playback.

Therefore, for convenience of explanation, in the following explanation, the operating body when the production control CPU 126 functions as a production control processor will be referred to as the "production control unit 210", and the operating body that manages time related to production will be referred to as "the production control unit 210". It will be referred to as "time management section 230" or "ACT". In addition, when the production control CPU 126 functions as a production reproduction processor, the operating bodies are "display control unit 220", "audio control unit 222", "lamp control unit 224", and "motor control unit 226" as appropriate depending on the content. ” or “input control unit 228.” Note that these control units 220, 222, 224, 226, and 228, which function as performance reproduction processors, may be collectively referred to as "individual control units."

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the production control process executed by the production control CPU 126. This production control process is executed, for example, in a timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from a reset start (main) process (not shown). The performance control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (eg, several tens of μs to several ms cycle) during execution of the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

The production control processing includes command reception processing (step S400), working memory production management processing (step S401), production symbol management processing (step S402), firing position designation processing (step S403), display output processing (step S404), and input processing. The configuration includes subroutines of control processing (step S405), lamp drive processing (step S406), sound drive processing (step S408), performance random number update processing (step S410), and other processing (step S412). The basic flow of the production control process will be explained below along with each process.

Step S400: In the command reception process, the production control unit 210 receives a production command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. In addition, the effect control unit 210 analyzes the received commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 by type. In addition, the production commands transmitted from the main control CPU 72 include, for example, a normal power supply opening command, a general power supply closing command, a special symbol destination determination production command, a production command when the number of working memory increases (special symbol), and a (special symbol) command. ) Production command when the number of working memories decreases, starting opening winning sound control command, demonstration production command, lottery result command, variation pattern command, variation start command, stop symbol command, command when symbol is stopped, state specification command, special electric release command, There are special electric closing commands, round number commands, firing position designation commands, error notification commands, jackpot end effect commands, fluctuation pattern destination determination commands, stop display time end commands, etc.

Step S401: In the working memory performance management process, the performance control unit 210 controls the execution of the above-mentioned storage number display performance and the pre-read preview performance using the marker M1. The contents of the working memory performance management process will be further described later with reference to other drawings.

Step S402: In the performance symbol management process, the performance control unit 210 controls the contents of the variable display performance and the stop display performance using the performance symbol Hz and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2, and controls the content of the first variable winning device 30 or the second The contents of the performance during the opening/closing operation of the variable winning device 31 are controlled. In addition, in this process, the performance control unit 210 selects performance patterns for various preview performances (pre-ready notice performance before reach occurrence, notice performance after reach occurrence, etc.). As described above, in the performance symbol management process, the performance control unit 210 controls the performance contents displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 (performance contents related to the performance symbol Hz, the fourth symbol Z1, Z2, the markers M1, M2, the performance during the big role, etc.) The process of determining the contents of various preview performances is executed. Note that the specific details of the processing will be described later.

Step S403: In the firing position designation process, the performance control unit 210 controls the designation display of the firing position according to the game state (display of "right-handed hit"), and also controls the lottery trigger by the ball entering the right starting prize opening 28b. Controls the disclosure that the occurrence is possible (highlighting "right-handed hit"), the occurrence of a lottery trigger due to the ball actually entering the right-start winning slot 28b, and the disclosure that the accumulation of working memory has been realized due to this. do.

Step S404: In the display output process, first, the performance control unit 210 sends the display control unit 220 to the display control unit 220 to display the performance contents (for example, the working memory number of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the working memory performance pattern number, the pre-read notice Messages and control tables are set for instructing (effect pattern number, variable effect pattern number, change notice effect number, background pattern number, corresponding pending deletion, etc.). In response to this, the display control unit 220 issues a specific drawing instruction to the VDP 152 based on the set message and the contents of the control table, and controls the display operation of the liquid crystal display 42.

Step S405: In the input control process, first, the performance control unit 210 causes the input control unit 228 to control the operation member such as the performance switching button 45 from the player in synchronization with a scene that requests an operation by the player as the performance progresses. Instructs to detect whether or not it is operated in a specified manner. More specifically, the production control unit 210 sets any input control table defined in advance in the control ROM 180. In response to this, the input control unit 228 analyzes the contents of the input control table that has been set, and based on this, sets a period during which operations on the operating member can be accepted. It also detects whether or not an operation (operation requested of the player) that matches the mode specified by the performance control unit 210 is performed, and outputs the detection result and returns it to the performance control unit 210.

Step S406: In the lamp drive process, first, the effect control section 210 sets a control table that instructs the lamp control section 224 about the effect contents. In response to this, the lamp control unit 224 relays the LED driver 198 and outputs a specific drive signal to the driver IC 132 based on the contents of the set control table, and outputs a specific drive signal to the various lamps 46 to 52, the panel lamp 53, etc. The light sources built into each part of the operation unit 60 are driven (turning on or off, blinking, changing the brightness gradation, etc.).

Step S408: In the sound driving process, first, the production control section 210 sets a control table that instructs the audio control section 222 about the content of production. In response to this, the audio control unit 222 instructs the audio IC 134 on specific output content based on the contents of the set control table, and the speakers 54, 55, 56 output sounds (sound effects) according to the production content. , BGM, etc.).

Step S410: In the performance random number update process, the performance control unit 210 updates various performance random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The effect random numbers include, for example, random numbers used for preview selection, random numbers used for normal background change lottery (effect lottery), and the like.

Step S412: In other processing, for example, first, the effect control section 210 sets a control table that instructs the motor control section 226 about the effect contents. In response to this, the motor control unit 226 instructs the SMC 199 on specific control contents based on the contents of the set control table. Furthermore, the SMC 199 creates an operation pattern for the movable body 40f based on instructions from the motor control unit 226, outputs a control signal corresponding to this to the driver IC, and drives the movable body 40f. The movable body 40f operates using the movable body motor 57 as a driving source, and performs effects in synchronization with the image display on the liquid crystal display 42 or independently.

Through the above performance control processing, the performance control section 210 can control the performance content in the pachinko machine 1 in an integrated manner. Next, the contents of the working memory performance management process executed in the performance control process will be explained.

[Working memory performance management processing]
FIG. 64 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of working memory performance management processing. The contents will be explained below along with an example procedure.

Step S700: First, the production control unit 210 confirms whether or not a production command for increasing the number of working memories has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the production control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and checks whether the production command for increasing the number of working memories is stored. If it is confirmed that the performance command when increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: Yes), the performance control unit 210 executes step S702. Note that if it cannot be confirmed that the performance command when increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: No), the performance control unit 210 does not execute step S702.

Step S702: The production control unit 210 executes production selection processing when the number of working memories increases. In this process, the production control unit 210 selects a production that displays the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol or the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol.

Step S704: The production control unit 210 checks whether the production command when the number of working memories decreases has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and checks whether the effect command when the number of working memories decreases is stored. If it is confirmed that the performance command when the number of working memories decreases is saved (step S704: Yes), the performance control unit 210 executes step S706. Note that if it cannot be confirmed that the performance command when the number of working memories decreases is saved (step S704: No), the performance control unit 210 does not execute step S706.

Step S706: The production control unit 210 executes production selection processing when the number of working memories decreases. In this process, the production control unit 210 executes a production that makes the marker M1 or marker M2 corresponding to the lottery element consumed by the internal lottery disappear, and moves the remaining markers M1 and M2 that have not been consumed by the internal lottery to the left. Execute a slide effect.
After completing the above procedure, the effect control section 210 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 63).

[Production design management processing]
FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the production symbol management process. The production symbol management process includes execution selection processing (step S500), production symbol variation pre-processing (step S502), production symbol variation processing (step S504), production symbol stop display processing (step S506), and variable winning device operation time. The configuration includes a subroutine group of processing (step S508). The basic flow of the production symbol management process will be explained below along with each process.

Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control unit 210 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of steps S502 to S508). For example, the performance control unit 210 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the performance symbol management process in the "jump table" as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the variable display effect has not yet started, the effect control unit 210 selects the effect symbol variation pre-processing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the production symbol fluctuation pre-processing has already been completed, the production control unit 210 selects the production symbol variation processing (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the production symbol variation processing has been completed, The effect pattern stop display processing (step S506) is selected as the next jump destination. Further, the variable winning device activation process (step S508) is selected as a jump destination only when the variable winning device management process (step S5000 in FIG. 18) is selected by the main control CPU72. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

Step S502: In the performance symbol variation pre-processing, the performance control unit 210 performs work to prepare conditions for starting a variable display performance using the performance symbol Hz and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2. In addition, in this process, the performance control unit 210 selects the content of the reach performance according to various conditions (lottery results, winning type (type of winning symbol), variation pattern, etc.), and the performance pattern ( (pre-reach notification pattern, post-reach notification pattern, etc.). In addition, the production control unit 210 also controls demonstration production when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. Note that the specific contents of the process will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S504: In the performance symbol variation process, the performance control unit 210 generates control information to instruct each individual control unit as necessary. For example, when performing a performance using the performance switching button 45 during execution of a variable display performance, the performance control unit 210 causes the input control unit 228 to monitor whether or not the performance switching button 45 is operated by the player, and the result Instructs the display control unit 220 to control information on the presentation content (button presentation) corresponding to the content of the presentation.

Step S506: In the performance symbol stop display process, the performance control unit 210 controls the content of the stop display performance according to the result of the internal lottery, and instructs each individual control unit. For example, the performance control unit 210 instructs the display control unit 220 to end the variable display performance and execute the stop display performance. In response to this, the display control unit 220 actually ends the variable display performance that has been executed up to that point on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and executes the stop display performance. As a result, the stop display effect is executed approximately in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and it is possible to visually teach (disclose, announce, notify, etc.) the result of the internal lottery to the player (execution of the symbol effect). means).

Step S508: In the process when the variable winning device is activated, the performance control unit 210 controls the performance content during the small winning game or the jackpot. In this process, the performance control unit 210 selects the content of the performance during the big win according to various conditions (for example, winning type). Note that the specific contents of the process will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

[Pre-processing for production pattern variation]
FIG. 66 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the above-described production symbol variation pre-processing. The procedure will be explained below using an example procedure.

Step S600: The production control unit 210 checks whether a demonstration production command has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and checks whether a demonstration effect command is stored. As a result, if it is confirmed that the demonstration performance command is saved (Yes), the performance control unit 210 executes step S601.

Step S601: The production control unit 210 executes a demo selection process. In this process, the production control section 210 selects a demonstration production pattern. The demonstration performance pattern defines the content of the performance indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state.

When the above procedure is completed, the production control section 210 returns to the address at the end of the production symbol management process. Then, the performance control unit 210 returns to the performance control process as it is, and in the subsequent display output process (step S404 in FIG. 63) and lamp drive process (step S406 in FIG. 63), the content of the demonstration performance is based on the demo performance pattern. control.

On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demonstration production command is not saved (No), production control section 210 next executes step S602.

Step S602: The production control unit 210 checks whether the current internal state is the time shortening state and whether or not the current change target is the second special symbol. Specifically, the production control unit 210 accesses the flag area of the RAM 130 and checks whether the value of the flag based on the state designation command has been updated to a value indicating the time reduction state, and also updates the command of the RAM 130. The buffer area is accessed, and it is confirmed whether or not, for example, a performance command for increasing the number of working memories of the second special symbol is stored.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current state is the time shortening state and the current change target is the second special symbol (Yes), the production control unit 210 executes step S604. On the other hand, if the current state is a time reduction state and it cannot be confirmed that the target of this change is the second special symbol (No), that is, the current state is a non-time reduction state, or the current change If the target corresponds to at least one of the first special symbol, the performance control unit 210 executes step S605.

Step S604: The production control unit 210 executes the second special symbol time-saving production management process. In this process, the performance control unit 210 determines by lottery the content of the performance (each performance pattern such as a variable display performance, a preview performance, etc.) to be executed within the variable time of the second special symbol in the time shortened state. More specifically, the performance control unit 210 determines the performance pattern number corresponding to the content of the performance to be performed in the first part of the variable time, and also determines the performance pattern number corresponding to the content of the performance to be performed in the second part of the variable time. Tentatively determine the pattern number. In addition, the specific content of the second special symbol time-saving performance management process will be further described later with reference to the following flowchart.

Step S605: The performance control unit 210 checks whether the current change is a loss (non-winning). Specifically, the performance control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and checks whether the lottery result command for the non-winning time is stored. As a result, if it is confirmed that the non-winning lottery result command is saved (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S612. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command for non-winning is not saved (No), the effect control unit 210 executes step S606. In addition, it is also possible to confirm whether or not the current variation is a loss based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. That is, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to a missed normal variation or a missed reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is a missed variation. Alternatively, if the current stop symbol command specifies a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is a loss.

Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (loss) (Step S605: No), then the performance control unit 210 checks whether or not the current variation is a jackpot. Specifically, the performance control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and checks whether the lottery result command for the jackpot is stored. As a result, if it is confirmed that the lottery result command for the jackpot is saved (Yes), the performance control unit 210 executes step S610. Conversely, if it is confirmed that the lottery result command for the jackpot is not saved (No), only the lottery result command for the small win remains, so in this case, the production control unit 210 executes step S608. . In addition, it is also possible to confirm whether or not the current fluctuation is a jackpot based on the fluctuation pattern command or the stop symbol command. That is, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to a jackpot variation, it can be determined that the current variation is a jackpot. Furthermore, if the current stop symbol command corresponds to a jackpot symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is a jackpot.

Step S608: The performance control unit 210 executes a small hit time varying performance pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control section 210 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern number is prepared in advance in correspondence with the variable pattern command, and the effect control unit 210 refers to a effect pattern selection table (not shown) and selects the effect pattern number corresponding to the variable pattern command at that time. I can do it. Note that the effect pattern number may be prepared in pairs with the variable pattern command, or a plurality of effect pattern numbers may be prepared for one variable pattern command.

Furthermore, when a production pattern number is selected, the production control unit 210 refers to a production table (not shown), and selects the variation schedule (variation time) of the production pattern Hz and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 corresponding to the variation production pattern number at that time, Determine the mode of stop display, etc.

For example, when the small hit of the second special symbol changes in the time shortened state, the production control unit 210 changes the production symbol Hz and the fourth symbol Z2 while executing the reach production in the “stadium mode” state, and changes the final Then, a process for selecting a performance pattern for stopping and displaying the performance symbol Hz and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponding to the small hit is executed.
On the other hand, the production control unit 210 changes the production symbol Hz and the fourth symbol Z2 in a short time without executing the reach production when the second special symbol hits a small hit in a non-time reduction state, and finally changes the small hit. Processing is executed to select a performance pattern for stopping and displaying the performance symbol Hz and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponding to a hit.

The above procedure is for the case where the game corresponds to a "small hit", but when the game corresponds to a jackpot, the production control unit 210 confirms that it is a "jackpot" in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the effect control unit 210 executes step S610.

Step S610: The performance control unit 210 executes a jackpot time-varying performance pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control section 210 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. In addition, in the jackpot performance pattern selection process, the process may be further branched according to the jackpot stop symbols.

In addition, in the case of non-election, the following procedure is executed. That is, when the production control unit 210 confirms that the game is a failure in step S605 (Yes), it then executes step S612.

Step S612: The effect control unit 210 executes a change time variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control section 210 determines the effect pattern number at the time of failure based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. The performance pattern numbers when the game is off are classified into "normal deviation fluctuations", "short time deviation fluctuations", "missing reach fluctuations", etc., and detailed reach fluctuation patterns are defined for the "missing reach fluctuations". In addition, which presentation pattern number the presentation control section 210 selects is determined based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

When the production pattern number at the time of a miss is selected, the production control unit 210 refers to a production table (not shown), and selects the variation schedule (variation time and Determine whether or not a reach has occurred, in the case of a reach, the type of reach and the timing of the reach), and the mode of stop display (for example, "7" - "2" - "4", etc.). Note that the method for determining the effect when the game is a loss is the same when the game is a jackpot.

After executing any one of the above steps S608, S610, and S612, the production control unit 210 next executes step S614.

Step S614: The production control unit 210 executes a preview selection process (provision performance execution means). In this process, the performance control unit 210 selects by lottery the content of the preview performance to be executed during the current variable display performance. The content of the preview performance is determined based on, for example, the result of an internal lottery (winning or non-winning) and the current internal state (normal state, time shortened state). As mentioned above, the preview performance is to notify the player of the possibility that a reach state will occur during the variable display performance, or to notify the player that there is a possibility of a jackpot or small win in the end. . Therefore, when the game is not won, the selection ratio of the preview performance is set low, but when the game is won, the selection ratio of the preview performance is set higher than when the game is not won, in order to increase the player's expectations.

Step S616: The production control unit 210 executes mode production management processing. In this process, the effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting a background image according to the stay mode. For example, when the internal state is in a non-time saving state, the production control unit 210 executes a process of selecting a background image (an image representing a park) corresponding to the normal mode, and when the internal state is in a time saving state. In this case, a process is executed to select a background image corresponding to the stadium mode (an image representing a running car, an image representing a stadium). However, until the working memory of the second special symbol (up to 3 pieces) charged while staying in stadium mode is completely consumed, you can continue to use the stadium even if the internal state is in a non-time reduction state. The image to represent is selected.

When the above procedure is completed, the production control section 210 returns to the production symbol management process (last address). As a result, in the subsequent performance symbol variation process (step S504 in FIG. 65), the variable display performance and the stop display performance are executed based on the actually selected fluctuation performance pattern (symbol performance execution means), A preview performance is executed based on various preview performance patterns. In addition, various stay mode effects are executed based on the background (stay) mode pattern selected here.

[Second special figure time-saving performance management process]
FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol time-saving performance management process.

The second special symbol time-saving performance management process is a process that manages the content of the performance (various display performance, preview performance, etc. performance patterns) to be executed within the variable time of the second special symbol in the time shortened state. (effect determining means), is executed in the process of effect pattern variation pre-processing (step S604 in FIG. 66). The procedure will be explained below using an example procedure.

Step S900: The production control unit 210 executes a pre-variation start lottery process. In this process, the performance control unit 210 executes a performance lottery regarding the content of the performance (first stage performance) to be executed in the first part of the variable time (hereinafter abbreviated as "first part of variation"), and At the same time as final determination of the performance pattern, a performance lottery is performed regarding the contents of the performance (second stage performance) to be performed in the latter part of the variable time (hereinafter referred to as "the second part of variation"), and the performance pattern of the second part of the fluctuation time is determined. tentatively decided. These performance lottery drawings are executed based on whether or not the fluctuation corresponds to a hit. Whether or not the variation corresponds to a hit can be confirmed based on the lottery result command for the variation.

Here, the "pre-fluctuation section" refers to an interval from the start of fluctuation until a certain period of time has elapsed, and can also be referred to as a working memory charge interval. The "later part of the variation" refers to the section from when a certain period of time has passed after the start of the variation until the end of the variation. In addition, "tentatively decided" means to decide provisionally in advance, and the temporarily decided production pattern may or may not be adopted in the actual production depending on the subsequent situation. .

Note that the situation in which the provisionally determined performance pattern is adopted will be described later with reference to another drawing. In addition, specific examples of the performance pattern for the first part of the fluctuation that is actually determined by the lottery process before the start of fluctuation and the performance pattern for the second part of the fluctuation that is tentatively determined (the lottery table used in the lottery process before the start of fluctuation) are also shown in another drawing. will be described later with reference to.

Step S902: The production control unit 210 sets a message according to the result of the production lottery executed in the previous step S900 in the message buffer for production reproduction. Here, the "effect reproduction message buffer" refers to a buffer area of the RAM 130 in which a message instructing reproduction of a specific effect is stored.

Step S904: The production control unit 210 executes ACT activation processing. In this process, the effect control unit 210 activates ACT (time management unit 230) to read the message set in the effect reproduction message buffer in the previous step S902. As a result, the time progression of the performance corresponding to the message is managed by ACT, and a reproduction instruction is given to each individual control unit 220, 222, 224, 226, 228 to start the reproduction (execution) of the performance. The control ROM 180 stores data tables in which detailed schedules regarding various performances are defined, and the ACT uses these data tables to control the time progression of the performance corresponding to the message set in the performance playback buffer. to manage.

Step S908: The production control unit 210 sets the waiting time from ACT to notification of subsequent timing. Here, the "later stage timing notification" refers to the timing at which the section of the later part of the variation starts, which is sent from the ACT to the production control unit 210 at a timing when a certain period of time has passed after the start of the variation. It is a notification that informs people. That is, the production control unit 210 sets a certain time as the waiting time, and waits for notification from the ACT until the set time elapses.

After completing the above procedure, the production control unit 210 returns to the production symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 66).

[Second special drawing time saving later part production management processing]
FIG. 68 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the second special symbol time saving time latter stage production management process.

The second special symbol time saving time latter part performance management process is a process for managing the content of the performance (various display performance, preview performance, etc. performance patterns) to be executed in the latter part of the variable time of the second special symbol in the time shortening state. (variation performance determining means) is called and executed during the process of performance symbol variation (step S504 in FIG. 65). The procedure will be explained below using an example procedure.

Step S920: The production control unit 210 checks whether the waiting time until the notification of the subsequent timing set in the process of the second special figure time-saving production management process (step S908 in FIG. 67) has elapsed. do. If the waiting time has elapsed (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S922. On the other hand, if the waiting time has not yet elapsed (No), the effect control unit 210 returns to the calling process.

Step S922: The production control unit 210 checks whether the subsequent timing notification from ACT has been received. If the subsequent stage timing notification has been received (Yes), the production control unit 210 executes step S924. On the other hand, if the subsequent timing notification has not been received (No), the effect control unit 210 returns to the calling process. It should be noted that the second special figure time-saving time latter stage performance management process (FIG. 68) is controlled not to be called after this step S922 is executed once within one variable time.

Step S924: The production control unit 210 executes a lottery process before the start of the second stage. In this process, the performance control unit 210 performs a performance lottery regarding the contents of the performance to be performed in the variable subsequent stage (second stage performance) to determine the performance pattern of the variable subsequent stage. In addition, this production lottery is based on the number of winning symbols out of the maximum of 4 that is the sum of the fluctuation and the working memory of the second special symbol charged in the section before the fluctuation (working memory charging section). number of items). The variation and the number of hits in the working memory of the second special symbol are determined by the lottery result command for the variation and the special symbol destination determination performance command sent from the main control CPU 72 when the working memory of the second special symbol increases. Confirmation is possible based on etc.

In addition, a specific example of the performance pattern of the variable rear part (lottery table used in the lottery process before the start of the latter part) which is finally determined by the lottery process before the start of the latter part will be described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S926: The production control unit 210 sets a message corresponding to the result of the production lottery executed in the previous step S924 in the preliminary message buffer. Here, the "preliminary message buffer" refers to a buffer area in the RAM 130 for temporarily storing messages before storing them in the effect reproduction message buffer.

Step S928: The performance control unit 210 determines whether or not the performance lottery executed in the pre-start lottery process of step S924 has ended normally, that is, whether the determined performance pattern of the variable subsequent stage corresponds to the number of winning pieces. Check whether it is true or not. For example, if the performance pattern that should be selected when the hit is true even though it is not a hit is determined, or when the number of hits is 4 even though the number of hits is 2. If there is a discrepancy between the game situation and the content of the performance, such as a performance pattern that should be selected in (Some abnormality has occurred).

As a result of the confirmation, if the performance lottery has ended normally (Yes), the performance control unit 210 executes step S930. On the other hand, if the performance lottery has not ended normally (No), the performance control unit 210 returns to the calling process.

Step S930: The effect control unit 210 clears all contents set in the effect reproduction message buffer.

Step S932: The effect control unit 210 sets the message set in the preliminary message buffer in step S926 to the effect reproduction message buffer.

By executing steps S930 and S932, the message corresponding to the production pattern of the latter part of the variation that was provisionally determined in the pre-variation start lottery process (step S900 in FIG. 67) and set in the message buffer for production reproduction is It is overwritten by the message corresponding to the performance pattern of the variable later part that was determined in the lottery process before the start of the latter part in step S924 and set in the preliminary message buffer.

Step S934: The production control unit 210 executes ACT switching processing. In this process, the effect control unit 210 restarts ACT and reads the message set in the effect reproduction buffer in the previous step S932. As a result, the time progression of the performance corresponding to the message according to the result of the re-lottery by the lottery process before the start of the second part is managed by ACT, and the reproduction instructions are given to each individual control unit 220, 222, 224, 226, 228. is performed, and reproduction (execution) of the effect corresponding to the latter part of the variation is started.

After completing the above procedure, the effect control section 210 returns to the calling process.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the performance pattern of the performance performed in the first stage of the fluctuation (first stage performance) is determined by lottery based on the winning and losing results of the fluctuation at the timing when the fluctuation starts (Fig. 67 In step S900), the first stage performance is executed in the first stage section of the fluctuation, that is, the section from the start of the fluctuation until a certain period of time has elapsed (working memory charge section). Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the player is charged a certain number of working memories within the working memory charging period to sustain the player's desire to play, and the pre-stage presentation gives the player a sense of anticipation for the game. You can hold it.

In addition, the performance pattern of the performance executed in the latter part of the variation (second part performance) is tentatively determined by lottery based on the winning and losing results of the variation at the timing when the variation starts (step S900 in FIG. 67). At the timing when the latter part of the variation starts, the final decision is made by re-drawing based on the variation and the winning/losing results in the working memory (the variation and the number of hits in the working memory of the second special symbol) (step S924 above). ). Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the performance in the latter part of the variation is executed according to the performance pattern based on the fluctuation and the winning/losing result of the working memory, so that it is possible to attract the player to the game without getting bored of the player. .

However, if an unexpected situation occurs during the re-drawing stage, there is a risk that it will interfere with the execution of the performance, so it will be treated as an abnormality and the re-drawing will not be held. Even if the re-lottery is held, the result is not adopted, and the performance pattern provisionally determined by the lottery before the start of the variation is adopted, and the latter stage performance is executed. Here, "if an unexpected situation occurs" specifically means a case where the subsequent timing notification is not received even though the waiting time has elapsed (step S922: No), or a case where the re-lottery is not performed normally. This applies if the process has not been completed (step S928: No).

The fact that the subsequent timing notification has not been received even though the waiting time has elapsed means that the ACT has not been able to transmit the subsequent timing notification to the production control unit 210 at the expected timing. Furthermore, the fact that the re-lottery has not ended normally means that the results of wins and losses are not appropriately reflected in the lottery. In such a case (step S922: No, step S928: No), the effect control unit 210 considers that some abnormality has occurred. Possible causes of the abnormality include inconsistency in the data table that ACT refers to when managing time progression, inconsistency in the lottery table, and the intervention of other electromagnetic peripheral noise. In such a case, the production control unit 210 does not perform a re-lottery (step S924) in the pre-start lottery process for the second part, but temporarily determines the lottery result in the pre-variation start lottery process (step S900 in FIG. 67). A performance pattern is adopted to perform a second stage performance.

If an unexpected situation occurs during the re-drawing stage, but it is overlooked and normal processing is continued without performing exception processing, the execution of the performance may suddenly stop, or the game may be interrupted. The player may end up performing a performance that does not match the situation, and as a result, the player may feel distrustful or uncomfortable. In contrast, in the present embodiment, if an unexpected situation occurs during the re-lottery stage, a performance pattern tentatively determined in advance is adopted to perform the subsequent stage performance. Although the winning/losing results of the working memory charged within the working memory charge period are not reflected in the subsequent performance executed in this case, at least the winning/losing results of the fluctuation are reflected. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, even if an unexpected situation occurs, the performance can be appropriately executed without making the player feel distrustful or uncomfortable with the game.

[Example of a lottery table used in the production lottery before the fluctuation starts]
FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table (performance pattern targeted for lottery) used in the pre-variation start lottery process (step S900 in FIG. 67).

As mentioned above, the lottery process before the start of fluctuation is a performance lottery that permanently determines the performance pattern for the first part of the fluctuation and provisionally determines the performance pattern for the second part of the fluctuation, and determines whether or not the fluctuation corresponds to a hit. It will be executed based on this.

(A) in FIG. 69: A diagram showing an example of a front stage performance pattern.

As explained in conjunction with the stadium mode production examples (Figs. 53 to 62), the pre-stage production (production executed in the variable pre-stage part) includes various elements (images) representing the state of the stadium before the start of the baseball game. , audio, lamps, etc.). One of the plurality of patterns prepared in advance for each of these elements is selected according to the result of the performance lottery, and is executed as the first stage performance. In order to facilitate understanding of the invention, an example of an image pattern displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 will be described here.

In this example, three types of front stage performance patterns are prepared. Of these, pattern number "F1" corresponds to an image that displays the stadium (distant view of the whole, spectator seats, cheering scenes, etc.), and pattern number "F2" shows the stadium. The pattern number "F3" corresponds to the effect in which an image of shooting stars passing by is displayed in addition to the image of the stadium, and the pattern number "F3" corresponds to the effect in which an image of beer vendors passing by is displayed in addition to the image of the stadium. There is. Pattern numbers "F2" and "F3" suggest the degree of expectation by displaying special elements. In addition, pattern number "F1" can be selected when the fluctuation corresponds to either a hit or a miss, but pattern numbers "F2" and "F3" can be selected when the fluctuation corresponds to a hit. Can be selected only if

(B) to (D) in FIG. 69 are diagrams illustrating examples of performance patterns to be drawn by lottery when provisionally determining a provisional rear stage performance pattern, that is, a variable rear stage performance pattern.

As explained in conjunction with the stadium mode production examples (Figures 53 to 62), the latter part production (the production executed in the variable latter part) includes various elements (images, sounds, etc.) accompanying the start and progress of the baseball game. , lamps, etc.). One of the plurality of patterns prepared in advance for each of these elements will be selected according to the result of the performance lottery, and will be executed as the latter stage performance. In order to facilitate understanding of the invention, an example of an image pattern displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 will be explained here as well.

(B) in FIG. 69: A diagram showing an example of a temporary rear part performance start screen pattern.

In this example, three types of temporary rear part performance start screen patterns are prepared. Among these, pattern numbers "T1" and "T2" suggest the level of expectation based on the background color, and pattern number "T3" indicates the level of expectation based on the appearance of an element different from the background color. Also, pattern number "T1" can be selected when the fluctuation corresponds to either a hit or a miss, but pattern numbers "T2" and "T3" can be selected when the fluctuation corresponds to a hit or a loss. Can be selected only if

(C) in FIG. 69: An example of the provisional second part A performance pattern, that is, the pattern of the performance executed when “4-ball game” is selected on the alternative screen shown in (H) in FIG. FIG. If ``four-ball game'' is selected on the two-choice screen, a baseball game will be played in which the player challenges himself to get a home run in the fourth inning in the second half.

In this example, there are two types of patterns for the rear part A performance that can be provisionally determined. Of these, pattern number "A1" corresponds to a performance in which no home run can be hit, and pattern number "A2" corresponds to a performance in which one home run can be hit. Further, pattern number "A1" can be selected only when the variation corresponds to a miss, while pattern number "A2" can be selected only when the variation corresponds to a hit.

(D) in FIG. 69: Temporary rear part B performance pattern, that is, an example of the pattern of the performance executed when “One hit soul” is selected on the alternative screen shown in (H) in FIG. FIG. As explained in the stadium mode production examples (Figures 53 to 62), if "One hit soul" is selected on the two-choice screen, the baseball game will be played in the bottom of the 9th inning in the latter half of the production. The game starts with two outs and bases loaded ((K) in Figure 60).

In this example, there are two types of patterns for the rear part B effect that can be provisionally determined. Of these, pattern number "B1" corresponds to an effect in which the baseball game starts with a tied score, and pattern number "B2" corresponds to an effect in which the baseball game starts with a one point behind. Compatible. Furthermore, pattern number "B1" can be selected when the fluctuation corresponds to either a hit or a miss, but pattern number "B2" can be selected only when the fluctuation corresponds to a hit. It can be done.

Note that each performance pattern shown in the above lottery table is just an example, and different pattern selection conditions may be set for each performance pattern, and further variations of performance patterns may be prepared for each lottery table. Good too. In addition, each lottery table mentioned above is only a part of the lottery table used in the pre-variation start lottery process, and in reality, there are other effects (notices, etc.) that are prepared in the pre-variation stage. A performance lottery is also performed using a lottery table for determining the actual performance and a lottery table for tentatively determining other performances (notices, etc.) to be performed in the latter part of the variation.

[Example of a lottery table used in the production lottery before the start of the second part]
FIG. 70 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table (performance pattern targeted for lottery) used in the pre-start lottery process (step S924 in FIG. 68).

As mentioned above, the lottery process before the start of the second part is a production lottery that actually determines the production pattern of the second part of the variation, and the second special symbol charged in the section of the variation (maximum 1) and the first part of the variation. It is executed based on the number of hits (maximum 4) out of the working memory (maximum 3).

(A) in FIG. 70: It is a diagram showing an example of a rear part production start screen pattern.

In this example, 10 types of start screen patterns are prepared. Among these, pattern numbers "T1" and "T2" suggest the level of expectation based on the background color, and pattern numbers "T3" to "T6" indicate the level of expectation based on the number of cheerleaders. Yes, the pattern numbers "T7" to "T10" suggest settings regarding the winning probability in addition to the expectation level based on the clothes of the characters.

Further, pattern selection conditions are not set for pattern number "T1", and pattern selection conditions according to the number of hits are set for the other pattern numbers "T2" to "T10". Therefore, if none of the fluctuations and the maximum three working memories correspond to a hit (the number of hits is "0"), pattern number "T1" will inevitably be selected. However, if the number of hits is "1", one of the pattern numbers "T1" to "T3" and "T7" is selected. If the number of hits is "2", one of the pattern numbers "T1" to "T4", "T7", and "T8" is selected. If the number of hits is "3", one of the pattern numbers "T1" to "T5" and "T7" to "T9" is selected. If the number of hits is "4", one of all pattern numbers "T1" to "T10" is selected.

(B) in FIG. 70: Shows an example of the second part A performance pattern, that is, the pattern of the performance executed when “4-ball game” is selected on the two-choice screen shown in (H) in FIG. It is a diagram.

In this example, five types of patterns for the rear part A effect are prepared. Of these, pattern number "A1" corresponds to a production in which no home run can be hit, pattern number "A2" corresponds to a production in which one home run can be hit, and pattern number "A3" corresponds to a production in which one home run cannot be hit. Pattern number "A4" corresponds to a production that allows the player to hit two home runs, pattern number "A5" corresponds to a production that allows the player to hit four home runs. .

For each production pattern, pattern selection conditions are set according to the number of hits. Specifically, if none of the fluctuations and the maximum of three reservations corresponds to a hit (the number of hits is "0"), pattern number "A1" is selected. Also, when the number of hits is "1", pattern number "A2" is selected, and when the number of hits is "2", pattern number "A3" is selected, and the number of hits is "3". If so, pattern number "A4" is selected, and if the number of hits is "4", pattern number "A5" is selected.

Note that the pattern selection condition for each performance pattern may be set to "when the number of winning pieces is 'N' or more" instead of the above-mentioned "when the number of winning pieces is 'N'". If the pattern selection conditions are changed in this way, if the number of hits is "0", pattern number "A1" will still be selected, but if the number of hits is "1", pattern number "A1" will be selected. ” or “A2” is selected and the number of hits is “2”, if any of the pattern numbers “A1” to “A3” is selected and the number of hits is “3” , one of pattern numbers "A1" to "A4" is selected, and when the number of hits is "4", one of all pattern numbers "A1" to "A5" is selected. The Rukoto.

(C) in FIG. 70: Shows an example of the second part B performance pattern, that is, the pattern of the performance executed when “One hit soul” is selected on the two-choice screen shown in (H) in FIG. It is a diagram.

In this example, five types of patterns for rear part B effects are prepared. Of these, pattern number "B1" corresponds to an effect in which the baseball game starts with a tied score, and pattern number "B2" corresponds to an effect in which the baseball game starts from a one-point behind situation. , pattern number "B3" corresponds to an effect in which the baseball game starts from a position of 2 points behind, and pattern number "B4" corresponds to an effect in which the baseball game starts from a state in which the player is 3 points behind. , pattern number "B5" corresponds to an effect in which the baseball game starts from a 4-point behind position.

No pattern selection condition is set for pattern number "B1", and pattern number "B1" can be selected regardless of the number of hits from "0" to "4". On the other hand, for other pattern numbers "B2" to "B5", pattern selection conditions are set according to the number of hits. Therefore, when the number of hits is "0", pattern number "B1" is selected, and when the number of hits is "1", either pattern number "B1" or "B2" is selected. , when the number of hits is "2", one of pattern numbers "B1" to "B3" is selected, and when the number of hits is "3", pattern numbers "B1" to "B4" are selected. ” is selected and the number of hits is “4”, one of all pattern numbers “B1” to “B5” will be selected.

Note that each performance pattern shown in the above lottery table is just an example, and different pattern selection conditions may be set for each performance pattern, and further variations of performance patterns may be prepared for each lottery table. Good too. In addition, each lottery table mentioned above is only a part of the lottery table used in the lottery process before the start of the second stage, and in reality, other effects (notices, etc.) are prepared for the variable second stage. ) A performance lottery will be held using a lottery table to determine the final result.

[Comparison of how production patterns are determined]
FIG. 71 is a diagram illustrating the manner in which the pattern of performance to be executed within the variable time of the second special symbol in the time shortened state is determined by comparing cases in a normal state, an abnormality occurrence, and a comparative example. . The area within the thick solid line frame shown in each figure indicates the effect pattern that will be permanently determined in the corresponding lottery process, and the area within the thick broken line frame indicates the effect pattern that will be tentatively determined in the corresponding lottery process. There is. Each case will be explained below.

(A) in FIG. 71: represents the manner in which the performance pattern is determined in a normal state.

During normal operation, first, in the pre-variation start lottery process (step S900 in FIG. 67), the performance pattern for the first part of the variation is permanently determined, and the performance pattern for the second part of the variation is tentatively determined. Thereafter, in the lottery process before starting the subsequent part (step S924 in FIG. 68), the performance pattern for the variable subsequent part is permanently determined, and is overwritten with the performance pattern for the variable subsequent part that has been tentatively determined in advance. As a result, in the section of the pre-variation section, a performance based on the performance pattern of the pre-variation section that is actually determined in the pre-variation start lottery process is executed. In addition, in the section of the variable latter part, a performance based on the performance pattern of the variable latter part which is actually determined in the lottery process before the start of the latter part is executed.

(B) in FIG. 71: represents the manner in which the performance pattern is determined when an abnormality occurs.

Even when an abnormality occurs, as in the case of normal conditions, in the pre-variation start lottery process (step S900 in FIG. 67), the performance pattern for the first part of the variation is permanently determined, and the performance pattern for the second part of the variation is tentatively determined. It is determined. However, since an abnormality occurs at the stage of executing the lottery process before the start of the second stage (step S924 in FIG. 68), the lottery process before the start of the second stage is not executed, or even if it is executed, the lottery result is not adopted. , the performance pattern of the latter part of the variation, which had been tentatively determined in advance, will be adopted as is. As a result, in the section of the pre-variation section, a performance based on the performance pattern of the pre-variation section that is actually determined in the pre-variation start lottery process is executed. In addition, in the section of the latter part of the variation, a performance based on the performance pattern of the latter part of the variation which is provisionally determined in the pre-variation start lottery process is executed.

(C) in FIG. 71: As a comparative example, this shows how performance patterns are determined in a general gaming machine.

In a general gaming machine, the pattern of performance to be executed within the variable time is all decided in the performance lottery executed before the start of the variation. Therefore, in a typical gaming machine, a performance based on a performance pattern determined before the start of the fluctuation is executed during the period from the start of the fluctuation to the end of the fluctuation.

As mentioned above, in general gaming machines, performances are executed according to the performance pattern determined before the fluctuation starts, so even if the working memory corresponding to a win is charged during the fluctuation, the performance will be changed accordingly. The content will not change, and the latest situation will not be reflected in the production. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since it is possible to determine the performance pattern for the latter part of the variation based on the winning/losing result of the working memory charged in the section of the first part of the variation, the performance pattern for the latter part can be determined by reflecting the latest situation. It is possible to make the part production more diverse and fresh, and it is possible to further attract players to the game. In addition, in the event that an abnormality occurs, the performance pattern in the latter part of the variation will not be re-drawn (or the result of the re-lottery will not be adopted), but the performance pattern that was provisionally determined before the start of the variation will be adopted. Therefore, even when an abnormality occurs, the performance can be appropriately executed without making the player feel distrustful or uncomfortable with the game.

[Fire position specification process]
FIG. 72 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the above-described firing position designation process. The procedure will be explained below using an example procedure.

Step S800: The production control unit 210 acquires information on the firing position designation command. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and obtains the value of the firing position designation command.
Step S802: The effect control unit 210 checks whether the subsequent value of the acquired firing position designation command is "specified". Specifically, the effect control unit 210 determines that there is no designation if the subsequent value of the firing position designation command is "00H", and determines that there is "designation" if it is "01H". Here, if it is determined that there is a "designation" (Yes), the production control unit 210 proceeds to step S810, and if it is determined that there is "no designation" (No), the production control unit 210 advances to step S804.

[In the case of "No specification"]
Step S804: The effect control unit 210 checks whether or not the display of designation of the firing position is currently being instructed. The "firing position designation display" is, for example, a right-handed display in band area B on the screen (see FIG. 53, etc.). If the firing position designation display is instructed (Yes), the production control unit 210 executes step S808, and if not instructed (No), the process proceeds to step S806.

Step S808: The production control unit 210 executes a firing position designation cancellation process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 instructs to cancel the firing position designation display. Here, "cancelling the firing position designation display" means, for example, ending the right-handed display in band area B on the screen and instead instructing a display such as "Please return to the left" or instructing audio output. It is the process of doing things like

Step S806: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the firing position designation display is being canceled. Since the above-mentioned "cancellation of the firing position designation display" is performed continuously for a certain period of time, if the production control unit 210 determines that the firing position designation display is being canceled (Yes), it executes step S808. On the other hand, if it is determined that the firing position designation display is not being canceled (No), the process exits and returns to the calling source.

[If “specified” in step S802]
Step S810: The effect control unit 210 executes a firing position designation display process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 instructs the execution of the right-handed display (FIG. 53, etc.) in the band area B on the screen.

Step S812: Next, the production control unit 210 executes a fluctuation history update process. In this process, the performance control unit 210 updates the history of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Step S814: Then, the production control unit 210 executes a specific firing designation process. In this process, the production control unit 210 issues an instruction regarding "specific firing designation". "Specific firing designation" is a disclosure that is made prominently on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, for example, to indicate that a lottery opportunity can be generated by the ball entering the right starting winning hole 28b ("right firing"). (highlighted display).
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control section 210 returns to the calling source.

[Processing when variable prize winning device is activated]
FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of processing when the variable winning device is activated. The procedure will be explained below using an example procedure.

Step S850: The production control unit 210 confirms whether or not the result of the current variation is a jackpot. Specifically, the performance control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, checks the lottery result command, and confirms whether it corresponds to a jackpot or a small win. As a result of this confirmation, if the result of the current variation is a jackpot (Yes), the production control unit 210 next executes step S852. On the other hand, if the result of the current variation is not a big hit (No), that is, if it is a small hit, the production control unit 210 next executes step S854.

Step S852: The production control unit 210 executes a process when the variable winning device is activated at the time of a jackpot. In this process, the performance control section 210 selects a performance pattern to be executed from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the jackpot game.

Specifically, the performance control unit 210 uses various image data regarding the performance pattern at the time of a jackpot, which is stored in advance in the image ROM 154 of the performance display control device 144 (VDP 152), as the performance during the big win to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. , executes a reading process according to the winning symbol.

Step S854: The performance control unit 210 executes a process when the variable prize winning device is activated at the time of a small hit. In this process, the performance control unit 210 selects a performance pattern to be executed from the start of the small hit to the end of the small hit.

Specifically, the performance control unit 210 selects a performance pattern (for example, a performance in which a car in which a female character is riding speeds up) indicating that the small winning game has started at the start of the small winning game, and selects a performance pattern that indicates that the small winning game has started, If you select the suggested effect and the game ball passes through a specific area during a small winning game, the effect pattern when passing through the specific area (a female character riding a car with a heart mark with the letter V drawn on it) Execute the process of selecting the desired performance.

When the above procedure is completed, the production control section 210 returns to the production symbol management process (FIG. 65).

As explained above, the above-described embodiment has the following effects.
(1) According to the present embodiment, the performance pattern of the second special symbol in the time shortened state (stadium mode) after the fluctuation is the action that is charged in the fluctuation and operation memory charge section before the start of the second special symbol. Since the final decision is made based on each win/loss result (number of winnings) in memory, the content of the performance executed within the variable time is compared to a general performance where the content of the performance is determined in advance before the fluctuation starts. , it is possible to execute an unprecedented fresh performance that reflects the latest situation, and it is possible to attract players to the game without getting bored.

(2) According to the present embodiment, the lottery regarding the production pattern of the latter part of the variation of the second special symbol in the time shortened state (stadium mode) is performed twice, and the first lottery performed before the start of the variation is used as a temporary lottery. After the final selection is made, a second lottery is held before the start of the second stage performance. Therefore, if an unexpected situation (for example, data inconsistency or surrounding noise) occurs during the second lottery, the performance pattern tentatively determined from the first lottery will be adopted and the second stage production will be performed. can be executed. Therefore, even if an unexpected situation occurs, the execution of the performance will not suddenly stop or the performance will not be executed with content that does not match the game situation, causing players to feel distrust or discomfort with the game. The performance can be executed appropriately without any trouble.

(3) According to the present embodiment, a working memory charging section of a certain length (for example, 20 seconds) is provided in the pre-fluctuation part of the second special symbol in the time shortened state (stadium mode), and within this section Since the first part of the performance is executed in which the performance pattern is determined based on the winning and losing results of the fluctuation, the player is charged a certain number of working memories during the working memory charging period to stimulate the player's desire to play. In addition to making the game last longer, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the game through the presentation of the first part.

(4) According to the present embodiment, since the type of baseball game effect executed in the latter part of the variation of the second special symbol in the time shortening state (stadium mode) can be selected by the player, A baseball game performance selected according to preference can be executed, thereby attracting players to the game and making them actively participate in the performance.

(5) According to the present embodiment, from the variable display performance of the second special symbol in the time reduction state (stadium mode), all the working memories of the second special symbol remaining at the end of the time reduction (transition to normal mode) are In the fluctuating display performance until it is consumed, a series of performances in which a background image representing the stadium is displayed is executed, so as the number of games increases, the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the time shortened state and its To make the player aware that the contents of the working memory charged within the variable time are reflected (influenced in some way) on the development of the baseball game, and to further attract the player to the game. I can do it.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented with various modifications. The mode of presentation mentioned in one embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the mode of presentation described above.

In the above-described embodiment, the performance pattern of the second special symbol in the time shortening state (stadium mode) after the variation is changed to each winning/losing result of the working memory charged in the variation and the working memory charging section (corresponding to the winning). However, the number is not limited to this. For example, the number of pieces that correspond to a predetermined reach variation in the working memory, the number of times the normal pattern gate passed during the first part of the variation time, the number of normal pattern changes, the number of normal pattern lottery hits, the number of normal electric accessory operations, The production pattern in the latter part of the variation is set according to any event that occurs within the section in the first part of the variation, such as the number of starting prizes, the number of balls fired, the number of out balls, or the number of operations of the operation means (for example, the production switching button 45). You may decide.

In the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which the period before the fluctuation (=working memory charge period) is the period from the start of the fluctuation until a certain period of time has elapsed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a certain period of time is selected from among multiple types according to the number of working memories of the second special symbol that has already been charged at the start of the variation, and the selected time is set as the length of the first part of the variation. Good too. In the case of such a configuration, a subsequent timing notification will be transmitted from the ACT to the production control unit 210 at the timing when the selected time has elapsed.

In the embodiment described above, the execution timing of the second performance lottery is at the end of the working memory charging period, but the timing is not limited to this, and for example, the working memory may be charged up to a predetermined number (for example, the maximum number of 3 pieces). The time point at which the second performance lottery is performed may be set as the execution timing.

In the embodiment described above, the lottery regarding the performance to be executed within the variation time of the second special symbol in the time shortened state is executed twice in total, before the start of the variation and before the start of the latter stage performance. may be executed three or more times. For example, it is also possible to vary the number of times the performance lottery is executed and its execution timing depending on the execution time of the first stage performance.

In the above-described embodiment, the stadium mode performance example (FIGS. 53 to 62) was explained using an example in which the working memory of the second special symbol is charged up to the maximum number (3 pieces) within the working memory charging section. Therefore, when "4-ball game" is selected on the two-choice screen ((H) in Figure 54), four balls are played corresponding to a total of four, including the fluctuation and three working memories. Although the effect of challenging for a home run chance was executed, the number of home run chances is not limited to four, and can be changed according to the number of working memories actually charged. For example, if one working memory is charged within the working memory charging period, an effect that challenges two home run chances is executed corresponding to the fluctuation and one working memory. You can.

The gaming machine of the above-mentioned embodiment has been explained as an example of a gaming machine (one type, two types mixed type) in which a jackpot game is executed when a specific area is passed during a small win game, and a time reduction state is entered after the jackpot game ends. However, it may be a gaming machine that shifts to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game by passing through a specific area, or a gaming machine that determines the gaming state after the end of a jackpot game depending on the type of the determined special symbol. You can.

The images listed as other examples of effects are just examples, and can be modified as appropriate. Further, the structure, board configuration, specific numerical values, etc. of the pachinko machine 1, including those shown in the drawings, are preferred examples, and it goes without saying that these can be modified as appropriate.

1 Pachinko machine 8 Game board unit 8a Game area 20 Starting gate 28 Variable start winning device 33 Normal symbol display device 33a Normal symbol operation memory lamp 34 First special symbol display device 35 Second special symbol display device 34a First special symbol operation memory Lamp 35a 2nd special symbol operation memory lamp 38 Game status display device 42 Liquid crystal display 45 Production switching button 70 Main control device 72 Main control CPU
74 ROM
76 RAM
124 Production control device 126 Production control CPU
130 RAM
180 Control ROM
210 Production control section 220 Display control section 230 Time management section (ACT)

Claims (1)

a lottery element acquisition means for acquiring lottery elements necessary for executing a predetermined lottery when a lottery opportunity occurs;
When the lottery element is newly acquired, a destination determining means performs a preliminary determination on the acquired lottery element;
lottery element storage means for storing the lottery element;
lottery execution means for executing the predetermined lottery using the lottery element when the lottery element is stored in a state where a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
When the predetermined lottery is executed, symbol display means causes symbols to be displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined varying time and then to be stopped and displayed;
a variable effect execution means for executing a variable effect in accordance with the variable display of the symbol within the variable time;
The content of the specific performance forming part of the fluctuation performance is determined before the start of the fluctuation of the symbol, and the content of the specific performance forming part of the fluctuation performance is determined, and the A gaming machine characterized by comprising: variable performance determining means that allows the content of the specific performance to be determined anew based on the number of results other than winning.

Images